0

0
 .
The 2003 Oldsmobile Silhouette Owner Manual

SeatsandRestraintSystems ........................... 1-1 Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-63

Front
Seats ............................................... 1-2 Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
RearSeats ............................................... 1-7 Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..... 4-2
Safety
Belts ............................................. 1-22 Towing ................................................... 4-32
Child Restraints ....................................... 1-45 Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Air Bag Systems ...................................... 1-69 Service ..................................................... 5-3
RestraintSystemCheck ............................ 1-77 Fuel ......................................................... 5-5
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1 Checking Things Under the Hood ............... 5-10
Keys ........................................................ 2-3 All-Wheel Drive ........................................ 5-50
Doorsand Locks ....................................... 2-9 Bulb Replacement .................................... 5-52
Windows ................................................. 2-24 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ......... 5-58
Theft-DeterrentSystems ............................ 2-27 Tires ...................................................... 5-60
StartingandOperatingYour Vehicle ........... 2-32 Appearance Care ..................................... 5-87
Mirrors .................................................... 2-45 Vehicle Identification ................................. 5-95
Onstar@System ...................................... 2-47 Electrical System ...................................... 5-96
HomeLink@ Transmitter ......................... 2-49 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-103
StorageAreas ......................................... 2-54 Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ...... 5-105
VehiclePersonalization ............................. 2-62 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6-1
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
InstrumentPanelOverview .......................... 3-4 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7-1
ClimateControls ...................................... 3-25 Customer Assistance Information .................. 7-2
WarningLights,Gages and Indicators ......... 3-39 Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 7-9
Messaye Center ....................................... n r ~
5-3L
\

Index ................................................................ 1
DriverInformationCenter (DIC) .................. 3-60

-
GM
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,
OLDSMOBILE, the OLDSMOBILE Rocket Emblem
and the name SILHOUETTE are registered trademarks
of General Motors Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time it
was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles first
sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of
Canada Limited” for Oldsmobile Division whenever it
appears in this manual.
Please keep this manual in your vehicle, so it will be
there if you ever need it when you’re on the road. If you
sell the vehicle, please leave this manual in it so the
new owner can use it.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 10324697 A First Edition
I
Canadian Owners
You can obtain a French copy of this manual from your
dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
How to Use This Manual
Many people read their owner’s manual frombeginningto
end when they first receive their new vehicle.If you do
this, it will help you learn about the features and controls
for your vehicle. In this manual, you’ll find that pictures
and words worktogether to explain things.
Index
A good place to look for what you need is the Index in
back of the manual. It’s an alphabetical list of what’s
in the manual, and the page number where you’ll find it.
@Copyright General Motors Corporation 06/24/02
All Rights Reserved
Safety Warnings and Symbols I
Youwill alsofind a circle
with a slash through it in
You will find a number of safety cautions in this book. this book. This safety
We use a box and the word CAUTION to tell you about symbol means “Don’t,’’
things that could hurt you if you were to ignore the “Don’t do this” or “Don’t let
warning. this happen.”

These mean there is something that could hurt L

you or other people.

~~ ~

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.

Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce
the hazard. Please read these cautions. If you don’t,
you or others could be hurt.

...
Ill
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Also, in this book you will find these notices:
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice will tell you about something that can damage
your vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be
covered by your warranty, and it could be costly.
But the notice will tell you what to do to help avoid
the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see CAUTION
and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in different
words.
You’ll also see warning labels on your vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Vehicle Symbols
Your vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols, used on your vehicle,
are shown along with the text describing the operation
or information relating to a specific component, control,
message, gage or indicator.
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage or indicator reference the following
topics:
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
 I 'hese are some examples of vehicle symbols you may find on your vehicle:

TWIST
CAUTION
POSSIBLE
INJURY
NOT
A LATCH BOTH LAP AND
SHOULDER BELTSTO

DO
PROTECT OCCUPANT
MASTER \
ENGINE

TEMP ACCESS
l.fJ
BELT WHENATACHING
PROTECT TURN
SIGNALS ENGINE
EYES BY FASTEN COOLANT
SHIELDING SEAT AIR BAG
FAN
BELTS
PARKING
pf
CAUSTIC
BATTERY
4CID COULD
CAUSE
MOVE SEAT
FULLY
REARWARD+
\!$
/k=
z
DO NOT INSTALL
A REAR-FACING
CHILD RESTRAINT
IN THIS SEATING
LAMPS

HAZARD
SECURE
BURNS POSITION WARNING
CHILD SEAT
FLASHER COOLANT OWNERS
PULL BELT MANUAL
AVO1D
SPARKS OR
DO NOT INSTALLA n I
FLAMES COMPLETELY
THEN SECURE SERVICE
CHILD SEAT
SPARK OR
'\I/'
FLAME
COULD SERVICE a
EXPLODE
BATERY
---I

1 MANUAL

V
 1 Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ............................... .........1.2
Manual Seats ............................ .............1-2
Six-Way Power Seats ..................................... 1-3
Eight-Way Power Seats ................................... 1-3
Heated Seats ................................................. 1-4
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-4
Head Restraints ............................................. 1-6
Rear Seats ....................................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Operation ....................................... 1-7
Flip and Fold Feature ..................................... 1-7
Split Bench Seats ........................................... 1-8
Captain Chairs ............................................. 1-13
Stowable Seat ............................................. -1-18
Safety Belts ................................................... 1-22
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-22
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ...... 1-26
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-27
Driver Position .............................................. 1-28
Satety Beit use During Pregnancy .................. 1-36
Right Front Passenger Position ....................... 1-37
Center Passenger Position ............................. 1-37
Rear Seat Passengers .................................. 1-39
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults .......................... 1-42
SafetyBeltPretensioners ..... ...................1-44
Safety Belt Extender ..................................... 1-44
Child Restraints ............................................. 1-45
Older Children .............................................. 1-45
Infants and Young Children ............................ 1-48
Child Restraint Systems ................................. 1-51
Where to Put the Restraint ............................. 1-54
Top Strap .................................................... 1-55
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................. 1-56
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) ........................... 1-58
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the
LATCH System ......................................... 1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position ......................... 1-60
Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Seat Position ............................................ 1-64
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position .................................... 1-66
Air Bag Systems ............................................1-69
Where Are the Air Bags? ........................... 1-71
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-73
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? ..................... 1-74
How Does an Air Bag Restrain? ..................... 1-74
What Will You See Afteran Air Bag Inflates? .......1-74
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle .........1-76
Restraint System Check .................................. 1-77
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................41 - 7I 17
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................ 1-77
1-1
Front Seats
Manual Seats
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
Use the lever located on adjust a manual driver’sseat while the vehicle
the front of the seat to is moving. The sudden movement could startle
adjust the seat forward or and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
rearward. Pull up the when you don’t wantto. Adjust the driver’s
lever to unlock the seat. seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Slide the seat to where
you want it and release
the lever. To make sure the seat is locked into place, try to move
the seat back and forth with your body.

1-2
Six-Way Power Seats
The six-way power seat
control is located on the
outboard side of the
Eight-Way Power Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the eight-way
power seat controls
are located on the
outboard sides of both
the driver’s and the front
passenger’s seats.

Move the front of the control up or down to adjust 0 Move the front of the control up or down to adjust
the front portion of the cushion up or down. the front portion of the cushion up or down.
0 Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust 0 Move the rear of the control up or down to adjust
the rear portion of the cushion up or down. the rear portion of the cushion up or down.

Lift up or push down on the whole control to move
the entire seat up or down.
To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide
the control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
Lift up or push down on the whole control to move
the entire seat up or down.
To move the whole seat forward or rearward, slide
the control toward the front or rear of the vehicle.
To raise and recline the seatback, push or pull the
top of the control forward or rearward.

1-3
Heated Seats Reclining Seatbacks
Your vehicle may have this
feature. If it does, the
heated seat switches are
located in the instrument
panel switchbank.

This feature will heat the lower cushions and lower back
of the driver’s and front passenger’s seats for added
comfort.
The left switch is for the driver’s seat and the right
switch is for the front passenger’s seat. Press the bottom
of the switch to turn the heater on. The indicator light
on the switch will be lit. Press the top of the switch
to turn the heater off. The heated seat switch will turn
off when the ignition is turned to OFF and will resume
operation when the ignition is turned to RUN, unless the
switch is manually turned off.
To adjust the manual seatback, pull up on the lever
located on the outboard sides of both the driver’s and
the front passenger’s seat. It is easier to recline the seat
if you lean forward, taking your weightoff the seatback.
If your vehicle has the eight-way power seats, there
is a power recliner. See Eight-Way Power Seats
on page 1-3.

1-4
 Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts can’t do their job
when you’re reclined like this.
The shoulder belt can’t do its job because it
won’t be against your body. Instead, it will be
in front of you. In a crash you could go intoit,
receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt can’t do its job either. In a crash
the belt couldgo up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would bethere, not at your
pelvic bones. This could cause serious
internal injuries.
But don’t have a seatback reclined if your vehicle
is moving. For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
1I
WSII
I- - - 1 .
UaGK
K- rl_- ---I
111 L i l t :
-.--‘I
Jt:a~allU Wtxu ~
___ a a l e l y
U
--#,-a*.
I
L - 1 1
U ~ I L

properly.

1-5
Head Restraints Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injuryin a crash.
Head restraints are fixed on some models and
adjustable on others. To adjust a head restraint,
slide it up or down.

1 -6
 2. Fold the seatback flat
Rear Seats on the seat, by either
pulling on the nylon
Rear Seat Operation strap on the rear of the
seat or lifting up on
The rear seats in your vehicle have levers and straps the lever located on the
used to adjust, remove and reinstall the seats. By using front of the seatback.
the levers and straps, in the correct order, you can If the seat adjusts, slide
easily remove the seats from the vehicle. it all the way back.
When you put the seats back in the vehicle, be sure
to follow the label on the backof the seat for proper
location.
3. Release the rear set of
Flip and Fold Feature hooks from the floor
pins by pulling the
The rear seats in your vehicle can be folded forward. nylon strap located
Use this feature for exiting and entering third row seats. at the base of the seat;
1. If the seats have the adjustable head restraints, hang onto thestrap as
push them fully down. the seat folds forward.

1-7
To return the seat(s) to the normal position, do the Split Bench Seats
following:
If you have the third row split bench seat, the seatbacks
1. Push the seat back and firmly push the rear hooks
can be folded forward or reclined individually and the
onto the rear floor pins by pushing down on the
seats can be removed individually.
rear of the seat.
2. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down. Folding or Rec'3ing the Seatb; ks
3. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon
strap on the back of the seat and raise the
seatback until it locks upright.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked. If the seatback isn't locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.

The seatbacks on each section of the split bench seat

can be either folded forward or reclined. The following
explains how to use the nylon strap or recliner lever
to fold or recline the seatbacks.

1-8
 To raise a seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the
recliner lever while raising the seatback until it locks
upright. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it is
locked into place.
To recline the seatback, pull the nylon strap or lift the
recliner lever. Press back on the seatback until you
reach the desired position then let go of the strap
or lever.
To return the seatback to an upright position, pull on
the nylon strap or lift the recliner lever without putting
any pressure on the seatback. Push and pull on
I the seatback to be sure it is locked into place.
Nylon Strap Recliner Lever

To fold the seatback forward,pull the nylon strap located

on the rear of the seat orlift up onthe recliner lever
located on the front of theseatback. The seatback will
lock into place.

1-9
Removing the Split Bench Seat
Make sure the seatback is in the upright position.
1. Lift the seatback recliner lever or pull the nylon strap
on theback of the seat to foldthe seatback forward.

3. To unlatch the front latches, squeeze the angled

2. From behind the bench seat, pull the nylon strap at
the center of the base of the seat to release the
rear latches from the floor pins.
Do not let go of the strap until the seat is folded all
the way forward.
bar toward the straight crossbar.
4. Remove the seat by rocking it slightly forward,
then toward the rear of the vehicle and then
pulling it out.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split
bench seat.

1-10
 Replacing the Split Bench Seat
If the seatback isn’t locked,it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatbackto be sureit
is locked.
A seat that isn iocked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
I installing it.
I
A safety belt that is improperly routel , not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide the
protection needed in a crash.The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety belts are properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
Make sure the seatback is in the upright position and
the safety belts are on the correct section of the seat.
Don’t put the sections of the bench seat in so they face
rearward because they won’t latch that way.
The split bench seats have seat position labels, located
on the back of each seat, showing where the seat
must go. Follow that diagram.
1-11
 3. If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
1. Squeeze the angled bar toward the solid crossbar
while placing the front hooks of the bench seat onto
the front two floor pins.

1-12
 Captain Chairs
If your vehicle has the captain’s chairs, the seatbacks
can be folded forward or reclined and the seats can
be removed.

Adjusting the Captain’s Chairs

(Second Row)
The second row captain’s chairs can be adjusted
forward or rearward.
There are two adjustment levers on each seat.
One is located below the center, in front of the seat.
The other is located across the rear of the seat.
If the front latches are not attaching correctly, Lift up either lever to slide the seat forward or rearward.
check that the seat is in the full rear position. Release the lever. Push and pull on the seat to make
4. Firmly push the rear hooks onto the rear floor pins sure it is locked into place.
by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
5. Try to raise the seat to check that it is locked down.
5. Lift thc scat5ack :ecli!?er !ever e!.‘=GI! the R y ! X
strap on the back of the seat and raise the
seatback until it locks upright.
7. Push and pull on the seatback to check that it
is locked.
Repeat these steps for the other section of the split
bench seat.

1-13
Folding or Reclining the Seatbacks

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move

forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.

To recline the seatback, lift up on the recliner lever,

located on the outboard side of the seat. Use the recliner
lever to move the seatback to the desired position.
It is easier to raise or lower the seatback if you
lean forward, taking the weight off the seatback.
The seatbacks on the second row captain’s chairs also
fold forward to put items behind theleft and right seats.
Lift up on the recliner lever and fold the seatback
forward. The seatback will lock into place when you
push it back to the upright position.
The armrests can be lowered or raised for entering or
exiting the vehicle.
Removing the Captain’s Chairs
I

2. The seat can then be lifted off the front floor pins
and removed from the vehicle.
1. Pull the nylon strap behind the chair to release the
rear hooks from the floor pins.

1-15
Replacing the Captain’s Chairs
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sureit
is locked.
A seal lat isn’t locked into place properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
1-16
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety beltsare properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.
Don’t put the seats in so they face rearward becausethey
won’t latch that way. For the second row,if you want
more storage room behind the seat, adjust the seat by
sliding it forward.
The captain’s chairs have seat position labels, located
on the back of the seat, showing where the seat
must go. Follow that diagram. The seat must be placed
in the proper location for the legs to attach correctly.
Make sure the seatbacks are in the upright position,
the seat belts are on the correct side of the chairs and
the second row captain’s chairs are in the full rear
position before beginning this procedure.
1. Hook the front latches over the front floor pins. 2. Push the rear of the seat down to lock the rear
latches onto the rear set of floor pins.
3. Push and pull on the seat to be sure it is properly
attached.

1-17
Stowable Seat
Your vehicle may have a stowable seat. The stowable
seat is a full bench seat and comes with the convenience
center. See Convenience Center on page 2-60 for more
information. The stowable seat can be removed and
replaced, or with the seatback folded, it can lie flush with
the convenience center.
Folding the Seatback
If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sure it
is locked.
1-18
To fold down the seatback,
pull up on the lever located
on the back of the seat
and push the seatback
down until it is locked
into place.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is
locked into place.
To raise the seatback, do one of the following:
From the rear of the vehicle, pull up on the lever to
release the seatback, then pull the strap, located
on the right side of the seat, to pull the seatback up.
The seatback has a patch of hook and loop
fastener to stow the strap on the rear of the seat
when not in use, or
from the passenger’s side sliding door, pull up on
the lever to release the seatback, then push up
on the seatback to raise the seat.
Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that it is
locked into the upright position.
Removing the Stowable Seat
1. Remove the convenience center, if it is in the
vehicle. See Convenience Center on page 2-60
for more information.
2. Make sure all items are off of the stowable seat.
3. If the seatback is down, put the seatback in
its upright position before removing the seat.
See “Folding the Seatback previously.
U U
4. From behind the bench seat, push up the release
handles at the base of the seat to release the
iatches from the fioor pins.
5. While holding onto the crossbar at the bottom of the
seat, remove the seat by rocking it slightly toward
the rear of the vehicle and then pulling it out.
This should be done in one motion.
Notice: Do not use the release handles to pull the
seat out. The handles couldbreak during removal.
This will not be covered by your warranty. Use
the crossbar at the bottom of the seat when pulling
the seat out.
1-19
Replacing +he Stowable Seat

A safety belt that is improperly routed, not

If the seatback isn’t locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the personsitting there. Always
press rearward on the seatback to be sureit
is locked.
properly attached, or twisted won’t provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured.
After installing the seat, always check to be
sure that the safety beltsare properly routed
and attached, and are not twisted.

Do not put the stowable seat in so it faces rearward

because it will not latch that way. The stowable seat has
to go in before the convenience center.See Convenience
Center on page 2-60 for moreinformation.
A seat that isn’t ~ _ c k e d i n place
to properly can
move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock theseat into place properly when
installing it.

1-20
The stowable seat has seat position labels, located on 1. Place the front hooks of the seat onto the front floor
the back ofthe seat, showing wherethe seat must go. pins in the third row. To do this, the seat will need to
Follow the floorpin diagram. Use the front floor pins of be angled so the front hooks clear the floor pins.
the floor cupsand the rearfloor cups in the third row.
If the front legs are not attached correctly, the rear
The seat must be placed in the proper location for the legs will not attach to the rear set of floor pins.
legs to attach correctly.
2. Firmly push the rear hooks into the rear floor pins
Make sure the seat is in its upright position before by pushing down on the rear of the seat.
beginning this procedure.
3. Try to raise the seat to make sure that it is
locked down.
4. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that
it is locked into place.

1-21
Safety Belts
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargoarea,
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety inside or outsideof a vehicle.In a collision,
belts properly. It tells you some things you should not people ridingin these areas aremore likely to
do with safety “-lts. Do not allow
be seriously injured or killed.
people to ride inany area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and safety belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle isseat in a
and using a safety belt properly.
Don’t let anyone ride where he or she can’t
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you’re not wearing a safety belt, Your vehicle has a light
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit that comes on as a
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
Light on page3-42.
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.

1-22
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law Why Safety Belts Work
says to wear safety belts. Here’s why: They work.
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as
You never know if you’ll be in a crash. If you do have it goes.
a crash, you don’t know if it will be a bad one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up a person wouldn’t survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them,
people who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk
away. Without belts they could have been badly hurt
or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter... a lot!

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it’s just a seat

on wheels.

1-23
 v)
0
3
CD
0
3
CD

3
CD
<
CD
0
3
?
The person keeps going until stopped by something. nr the instrument panel...
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...

1-25
or the safety belts!
A: Air bags are in many vehicles today and will
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That’s why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-26
be in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts - not instead of them. Every air bag
system ever offered for sale has required the use
of safety belts. Even if you’re in a vehicle that
has air bags, you still have to buckle up to get the
most protection. That’s true not only in frontal
collisions, but especially in side and other collisions.
Q: If I’m a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you’re in an
accident - even one that isn’t your fault - you and
your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver doesn’t protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-45
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-48. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you’ll want to know which restraint systems your
vehicle has.
We’ll start with the driver position.
1-27
Driver Position
This part describes the driver’s restraint system.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here’s how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. To see
how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lockif you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the beltgo back
slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.

1-28
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latchplate to make sure itis secure.
If the belt isn't long enough,see Safety Belt
Extender on page1-44.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. Andyou'd be lesslikely
?c! s!ide nnder the !2p he!!. !f y!n slid Llnder I?,?hehe!?
would apply force at your abdomen.This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo
over the shoulder and acrossthe chest. These partsof
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there's a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-29
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Before you begin to drive, move the shoulder belt
adjuster to the height that is right for you.
1-30
To move it down, push down on the button and move
the height adjuster to the desired position. You can
move the adjuster up just by pushing up on the shoulder
belt guide. After you move the adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it down without pushing the button
down to make sure it has locked into position.
of the belt is
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion
centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from
your faceand neck, but not fallingoff your shoulder.
Q: What’s wrong with this?

YOL ,an be se. sly hur, ... sl._-. Jer belt

is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It won’t give nearly

as much protection this way.

1-31
Q: What's wrong with this?

You can be seriously injured if your belt goes

over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.

A: The belt is over an armrest.

1-33
Q: What’s wrong with this?

You can be serious., injured if you wear - ~ - >

shoulder belt under yourarm. In a crash, your
body would movetoo far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would applytoo much force to
the ribs, which aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver orspleen.

A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should

be worn over the shoulder at all times.

1-34
Q: What's wrong with this?

You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.

In a crash, you wouldn't have the full width of
the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is
twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.

A: The belt is twisted across the body.

1-35
 Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they don’t wear safety belts.

To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and
the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.

1-36
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the Center Passenger Position
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it’s more
likely that the fetus won’t be hurt in a crash. For (Bench Seat)
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.

Right Front Passenger Position

To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 7-28.
The right frontpassenger’s safety belt works the same
way as the driver’s safetybelt - except for onething.
If you everpull the shoulder portion of the belt out all the
way, youwill engage thechild restraint locking feature.
If this happens,just let the belt go back all the way and
start again.

Lap Belt
If your vehicle has a third row rear bench seat, someone
can sit in the center position.

1-37
When you sit in the center position of the bench seat,
you have a lap safety belt, which has no retractor.
To make the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it
along the belt.
1-38
TO make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the
lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt isn’t long
enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 7-44.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
Rear Seat Passengers Lap-Shoulder Belt
It’s very important for rear seat passengers to buckle The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people in the belts. Here’s how to wear one properly.
rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than those
who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who aren’t safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.

Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions

l@ut 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Don’t let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across
you very quickly. If this happens, let the belt go back
slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you
more slowly.

1-39
 2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
In the third row, if the belt stops before it reaches
the buckle, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling
until you can buckle it.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-44.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

Third Row Outside Passenger Position

Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull down on the buckle
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way, end of the belt as you pull up on the shoulder part.
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way and
start again.

1-40
 -r

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt

is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.

The lap partof the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you’d be less likely
-
I- 1. I+ . ..--I-.*
. -,?-I .rl^- I--,*
:A
io siicie ur-lcljer tile lap WIL. I I yuu MU UI IUCI 11, 11 It= w e l l
I,. -,I

would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause

serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able take to belt restraining forces.
The safety he!t !ncks if there’s a sudden stop or a crash;
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor. To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.

1-41
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for
Children and Small Adults
Your vehicle may have rear shoulder belt comfort
guides. This feature will provide added safety belt
comfort for older children who have outgrown booster
seats and for smaller adults. When installed on a
shoulder belt, the comfort guide better positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
If your vehicle has a split bench seat in the third row,
there is one guide for each outside passenger position.
To provide added safety belt comfort for children
who have outgrown child restraints and booster seats
and for smaller adults, the comfort guides may be
installed on the shoulder belts. Here’s how to install a
comfort guide and use the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage pocket on the
side of the seatback.

1-42

4. Buckle, position and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Seat Passengers on page 1-39.
Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the
shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guides. Slide the guide into the storage pocket.
1-44
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners. You’ll find
them on the buckle end of the safety belts for the driver
and right front passenger. They help the safety belts
reduce a person’s forward movement in a moderate to
severe crash in which the front of the vehicle hits
something.
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you’ll need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. SeeReplacing
Restraint System Parts Aftera Crash on page 1-77.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
But if a safety belt isn’t long enough to fasten, your
dealer will order you an extender. It’s free. When you go
in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so
the extender will be long enough for you. The extender
will be just for you, and just for the seat in your vehicle
that you choose. Don’t let someone else use it, and
use it only for the seat it is made to fit. To wear it,
just attach it to the regular safety belt.
Child Restraints Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
Older Children lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap
belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching
the top of the thighs. It should never be worn
over the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.

Older children who have outgrown booster seats should

wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit next to a
window so the child can wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide.

1-45
 Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?

A: Move the child toward the center of the vehicle,

but be sure that the shoulder belt still is on the
child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s upper
body would have the restraint that belts provide.
If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
see Rear Safety BeltComfort Guides for Children
and Small Adults on page 1-42. If the child is
so small that the shoulder belt is still very close to
the child’s face or neck, you might wantto place
the child in a seat that has a lap belt, if your vehicle
has one.

Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can’t properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured.A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.

1-46
 Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the beltin
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt's force would then be applied
right on the child's abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt

should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child's thighs. This applies belt force to the child's
pelvic bones in a crash.

1-47
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact,
the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some age
must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.

People should never hold a baby in their arms

while riding in a vehicle.A baby doesn’t weigh
--
much until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
CAUTION:
(Continu??)

1-4%
For example, in a crast t only 25 mph
Children who are up against, or very close to,
(40 km/h), a 12-lb. (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly
any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
become a 240-lb. (1 10 kg) force on a person’s
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
arms. A baby should be securedin an
belts offer outstanding protection for adults
appropriate restraint.
and older children, but not for young children
and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt
system nor its air bag system is designed for
them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide.

1-49
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the

vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will
be used.
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing a
child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used
in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a
label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle
safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support forthe head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighsso much
compared with the restof its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest partof an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders. Infants
always should be secured in appropriate infant
restraints.

1-50
 Child Restraint Systems

The body structure of a young childis ,ite

unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen.In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that’s unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal
injuries. Young children always should be
secured in appropriate child restraints.

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a

m d c - \/shic!s, is 21 i n f b ~ mc,t-eint
t c\rctam d a c i n n d
‘:“” - - - * J ” - -
to restrain or position a child on a contmuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.

1-51

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with
the seating surface against the back of the infant.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
1-52
r
I
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
 Q: How do child restraints work?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle's owner.
For many years, add-on child restraints have
used the adult belt system in the vehicle. To help
reduce the chance of injury, the child also has to
be secured within the restraint. The vehicle's
belt system secures the add-on child restraint in the
vehicle, and the add-on child restraint's harness
system holds the child in place within the restraint.
One system, the three-point harness, has straps that
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to come down over each of the infant's shoulders and
improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. buckle together at the crotch. The five-point harness
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner, system has two shoulder straps, two hip straps and
QnrJ cnrnn Ihirvh-hgok
u
t I U "y'
V.J.,IV I
hnnctnr
UVVV....
V U V I .
c ndc h
---I.. ..U"- 2 filie-nnint
a\rn
I"""" a crotch strap. A sirieici rnay iake ihe piace o i hip
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see out straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps that
the window.
are attached to a flat pad which rests low against the
child's body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield has
straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shield
that S?..,l!?cJS up or io the side.

1-53
When choosing a child restraint, be sure the child
restraint is designed to be used in a vehicle. If it is,
it will have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
Then follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in a
booklet, or both. These restraints use the belt system
in your vehicle, but the child also has to be secured
within the restraint to help reduce the chance of personal
injury. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer
to the instructions that come with the restraint which may
be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and
to this manual. The child restraint instructions are
important, so if they are not available, obtain a
replacement copy from the manufacturer.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors, therefore, recommends that child
restraints be secured in a rear seat, including an
infant riding in a rear-facing infant seat, a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat and an older child
riding in a booster seat.
1-54
Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the front
passenger seat. Here’s why:
A child in a rear-facing child restraintcan be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s air bag inflates. Thisbecause
is the
back of the rear-facing child restraint would be
very close to the inflating bag.
air Always secure
a rear-facing child restraint inrear
a seat.
You may secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, but before youdo, always
move the front passenger seat as far back asit
will go. It’s better to secure the child restraint
in a rearseat.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure peoplein
the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint
in your vehicle- even when nochild is in it.
Top Strap
Some child restraints have atop strap, or "top tether".
It can helprestrain the child restraint during a collision.
For it to work, atop strap mustbe properly anchored to
the vehicle. Some top strap-equipped child restraints are
designed for use with or without the top strap being
anchored. Others require the top strap always to be
anchored. Be sure to readand follow the instructions for
your child restraint. If yours requires that the top strap be
anchored, don't use the restraintunless it is anchored
properly.
If the child restraint does not have a top strap, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether ornota kit I
is available.

In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child

restraints have a top strap, and that the strap be
anchored. In the United States, some child restraints
l l c n .h g \ r "
U.UV I U I
-r
--a-
n I f \/nIIr
n 2 tnn c t r at&. ..._ yactraint. _ h l c
I "_. t-hild
Y . V I L . d..

top strap, it should be anchored.

1-55
Don’t use a child restraint that requires a top strap in Top Strap Anchor Location
the right front passenger’s position because there’s
no place to anchor the top strap.
Anchor the top strap to one of the following anchor
points. Be sure to use an anchor point located on the
same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
If you have an adjustable head restraint, route the top
strap under it.
Once you have the top strap anchored, you’ll be ready
to secure the child restraint itself. Tighten the top
strap when and as the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions say.

Second Row

1-56
 I \

Third Row (50/50) Third Row (Stowable Seat)

An anchor bar for a top strap is located at the rear of The anchor bar for the stowable bench seat is located
the seat cushion for each second and third row outboard on the passenger's side of the crossbar. Use the center
coQtinn nncitinn
vuuIll1y yvulrl". .. se2tincJ yc!sitinr! tc! llse the anchnr har prnper!y. !f the
convenience center is in the vehicle, you must lift
the tray sill to use the anchor. See Convenience Center
on page 2-60 for more information.

1-57
Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers
for Children (LATCH System)
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. You'll find
anchors (A) in both second row captain's chairs.
In order to use the system, you need either a
forward-facing child restraint that has attaching
points (B) at its base and a top tether anchor (C), or a
rear-facing child restraint that has attaching points (B),
as shown here.

To assist you in locating the lower anchors for this child

restraint system, each seating position with the LATCH
system will have latches between the seatback and
cushion.

1-58
 If a LAT4-type child restraint isn’t attached to
its anchorage points, the restraint won’t be
able to protect a child sitting there. In a crash,
the child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraintis
properly installed using the anchorage points,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint. See “Securing a Child Restraint
Designed for the LATCH System’’ or “Securing
a Child Restraint in a Rear Outside Seat
Position” in the Index for information on how
to secure a child restraint in your vehicle.

With this system, use the LATCH system instead of the

vehicle’s safety belts to secure a child restraint.

1-59
Securing a Child Restraint Designed Securing a Child Restraint in a
for the LATCH System Rear Outside Seat Position

I
1. Find the anchors for the seating position you want
to use, where the bottom of the seatback meets the
back of the seat cushion.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 1 3

3. Attach the anchor points onthe child restraint to the

anchors in the vehicle. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. If the child restraint is forward-facing, attach the top
strap to the top strap anchor. See Top Strap on
page 1-55. Tighten the top strap according to
the child restraint instructions.
5. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, simply unhook the top
strap from the top tether anchor and then disconnect the If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
anchor points. system, see Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Children (LATCH System) on page 1-58.

1-60
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier
part about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child
restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint when
and as the instructions say.
1. Put the restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

In the third row, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt
if needed.

1-61
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the the retractor to set the lock.
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-62
 5. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. If you’re using a forward-facing child
restraint, you may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.

1-63
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Center Seat Position
You’ll be using the lap belt. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say. See the earlier part about the top strap
if the child restraint has one.
1-64
1 . Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the latch
plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
 4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you push
down on the child restraint. If you’re using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
6. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult or
larger child passenger.

1-65
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
n be seriously injured or killed if the front
Your vehicle has a front passenger air bag. Never put a
rear facing child restraint in this seat. Here’s why:
1-66
A cl ...- ..t a rear-facing child restraint can
passenger’s air bag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating air bag.
Always secure a rear-facing child restraint in
a rear seat.
Although a rear seat is a safer place, you can secure a
forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat.
You’ll be using the lap-shoulder belt. See the earlier part
about the top strap if the child restraint has one.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
1. Because your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
air bag, always move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing a forward-facing child restraint.
See Manual Seats on page 1-2.
2. Put the restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle's safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.

5. Pull the rest of the lap belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock.

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is

positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

1-67
 6. To tighten the belt, feed the shoulder belt back into
the retractor while you push down on the child
restraint. You may find it helpful to use your knee
to push down on the child restraint as you
tighten the belt.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.

1-68
Air Bag Systems
This part explains the frontal and side impact air bag
systems.
Your vehicle has four air bags - a frontal air bag for Frontal air L-JS for the driveran-. :ight front
the driver, another frontalair bag for the right front passenger are designed to deploy only in
passenger, a side impact air bag for the driver, and moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
another side impact air bag for the right front passenger. crashes. They aren’t designed to inflate at all
Frontal air bags are designed to help reduce the risk in rollover, rear or low-speed frontal crashes,
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal air bag. or in many side crashes.And, for some
But these air bags must inflate very quickly to do their unrestrained occupants, frontal air bags may
job and comply with federal regulations. provide less protection in frontal crashes
Here are the most important things to know about the than more forceful air bags have provided
air bag systems: in the past.
The side impact air bags for the driver and
right front passenger are designed to inflate
only in moderate to severe crashes where
something hits the side of your vehicle.
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash They aren’t designed to inflate in frontal,
if you aren’t wearing your safety belt- even if in rollover or in rear crashes.
.--.-
ywu
Le..-
IIQV‘t:
-.:w
Qll
L-m-
uaya.
\A/ACIY;~II
wwGca.*#ny
w , r n . s ~ e d a + \ r
yw-I aunccy
ksl+
Us#..

during a crash helps reduce your chance of Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
hitting things inside the vehicle or being belt properly - whether or not there’s an
ejected from it. Air bags are designed to work air bag for that person.
with safety belts but don’t replace them.

1-69
 A CAUTION:
~~

Both frontal and side impact air bags inflate not for young -..ildl-.J and infants. ..,ither
thevehicle’s safety belt system nor its air bag
with great force, faster than the blink eye.
of an
system is designed for them. Young children
If you’re too close to an inflatingbag,
airas you
and infants need the protection that a child
would beif you were leaning forward,it could
restraint system can provide. Always secure
seriously injure you. Safety belts help keep you
children properly in your vehicle. To read how,
in position for air bag inflation before and
see the part of this manual called“Older
during a crash. Always wear your safety belt,
Children” or “Infants and Young Children”.
should sit
even with frontal air bags. The driver
as far back as possible while still maintaining
control of the vehicle. Front occupants should There is a air bag
not lean on or sleep against the door. readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the air
bag symbol.

- ~~

nm.yone who is up against, or very closeto,

any air bag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Air bags plus lap-shoulder
belts offer the best protection for adults,but
CAUTION: (Continued)
The system checks the air bag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Air Bag Readiness Light on page 3-43
for more information.

1-70
Where Are the Air Bags?

The right front passenger's frontal air bag is in the

instrument panel on the passenger's side.
The driver's frontal air bag is in the middle of the The driver's side impact air bag is in the side of the
e*--":.-- ..*L--l
3lCCl II IY V V I IGGI.
driver's seatback closest to the door.

1-71
 If something is betweenan occupant and an
air bag, the bag might not inflate properly orit
might force the object into that person causing
severe injury or even death. The path of an
inflating air bag must be kept clear. Don’t put
anything between an occupant and an air bag,
and don’t attach or put anything on the
steering wheel hub or on ornear any other air
bag covering. Don’t let seat covers block the
inflation path of a side impact air bag.

The right front passenger’s side impact air bag is in the

side of the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

1-72
When Should an Air Bag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal air bags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact speed is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.”
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal air
bags, which adjust the amount of restraint according
to crash severity. For moderate frontal impacts, these
air bags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
If the front of your vehicle goes straight into a wall
that doesn’t move or deform, the threshold level
for the reduced deployment is about 12 to 18 mph
(19 to 29 km/h), and the threshold level for a full
deployment is about 18 to 24 mph (29 to 38.5 km/h).
The threshold level can vary, however, with specific
vehicle design, so that it can be somewhat above
or below this range.
If your vehicle strikes something that will move or
deform, such as a parked car, the threshold level will be
higher. The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal
air bags are not designed to inflate in rollovers, rear
impacts, or in many side impacts because inflation
would not help the occupant.
The side impact air bags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe side crashes. A side impact air bag
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed “threshold level.” The threshold level can vary
with specific vehicle design. Side impact air bags are
not designed to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts,
rollovers or rear impacts, because inflation would not
help the occupant. A side impact air bag will only deploy
on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an air
bag should have inflated simply because of the damage
to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs were.
For frontal air bags, inflation is determined by the angle
of the impact and how quickly the vehicle slows down
in frontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impact
q ; v hnme ; n f l q t ; A n ic A n t a r m i n o r 4 kt, thn InnQtinn
UBI
uuyir, *IIIIULIVI I Id UWLL.,IIIII ,”U
U J L, I W I V V U L I V ‘ I
and severity of the impact.
1-73
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the air bag sensing
system detects that the vehicle is ina crash. For both
frontal and side impact air bags, the sensing system
triggers a release of gas from the inflator, which inflates
the air bag. The inflator, the air bag and related hardware
are allpart of the air bag modules inside the steering
wheel, the instrument panel, and the side of the front
seatbacks closest to thedoor.
How Does an Air Bag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside
of the vehicle. The air bag supplements the protection
provided by safety belts. Air bags distribute the force
of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal air bags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts, and
many side impacts, primarily because an occupant’s
motion is not toward the air bag. Side impact air bags
would not help you in many types of collisions,
including frontal or near frontal collisions, rollovers, and
rear impacts, primarily because an occupant’s motion
1-74
is not toward those air bags. Air bags should never be
regarded as anything more than a supplement to
safety belts, and then only in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s frontal air bags, and only in moderate
to severe side collisions for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag.
What Will You See After an Air Bag
Inflates?
After the air bag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the air bag
inflated. Some components of the air bag module will be
hot for a short time. These components include the
steering wheel hub for the driver’sfrontal air bag and the
instrument panel for the right front passenger’s frontal
air bag. For vehicles with side impact air bags, the side
of the seatback closest to the driver’s and/or right
front passenger’s door will be hot. The parts of the bag
that come into contact with you may be warm, but
not too hot to touch. There will be some smoke and dust
coming from the vents in the deflated air bags. Air bag
inflation doesn’t prevent the driver from seeing or
being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop people
from leaving the vehicle.

When an air baa jnflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe
to do so. If you have breathing problems but
can’t get out of the vehicle after an air bag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an air bag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an air bag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger air bag.
Air bags are designed to inflate only once. After an
air bag inflates, you’ll need some new parts for
your air bag system. If you don’t get them, the air
bag system won’t be there to help protect you
in another crash. A new system will include air bag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic frontal
sensor, which helps the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more
severe frontal impact. Your vehicle is also equipped
with a crash sensing and diagnostic module,
which records information about the frontal air bag
system. The module records information about
the readiness of the system, when the system
commands air bag inflation and driver’s safety belt
usage at deployment. The module also records
speed, engine RPM, brake and throttle data.
Let only qualified technicians work on your air bag
systems. Improper service can mean that an air
bag system won’t work properly. See your dealer
for service.
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s airbag, or the air
bag covering on the driver’s and right front
passenger’s seatback, the bag may not work
properly. You may have to replace the air bag
module in the steering wheel, both the air bag
module and the instrument panel for the right front
passenger’s air bag, or both the air bag module
and seatback for the driver’s and right front
passenger’s side impact air bag. Do not open or
break the air bag coverings.
1-75
Servicing Your Air Bag-Equipped
Vehicle
Air bags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the air bag systems in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer and the service
manual have information about servicing your vehicle
and the air bag systems. To purchase a service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-10.
The air bag systems do not need regular maintenance.
1-76
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
air bag canstill inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an air bag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They
are probably part of the air bagsystem. Be sure
to follow proper service procedures, make and
sure the person performing work for isyou
qualified to doso.
Restraint System Check Replacing Restraint System Parts
Afte’ a Crash
Checking Your Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
A crash can damage the restraint systemsin
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may
anything that might keep a safety belt system from doing
not properly protect the person usingit,
its job, have it repaired.
resulting in serious injury or even deathin a
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. To help make sure your restraint
crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt systems are working properly after a crash,
is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. have them inspected and any necessary
Also look for any opened or broken air bag covers, and replacements made as soon as possible.
have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag system
does not need regular maintenance.)

1-77
If you’ve had a crash, do you need new belts or If the frontal air bags inflate, you’ll also need to replace
LATCH system parts? the driver’s and right front passenger’s safety belt
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary. buckle assembly. Be sure to do so. Then the new buckle
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if assembly will be there to help protect you ina collision.
worn during a more severecrash, then you need If an air bag inflates, you’ll need to replace air bag
new parts. system parts. See the part on the air bag system
If the LATCH system was being used during a more earlier in this section.
severe crash, you may need LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system wasn’t being used at the time of
the collision.

1-78
 Section 2 Features and Controls
Keys .................................................. ............2.3
RemoteKeylessEntry System ............ ............2.5
Remote Keyless Entry System Operatior1 ...........2.6
Doors and Locks ................................ ............2.9
Door Locks ....................................... ............2.9
Power Door Locks ........................................ 2-10
Last Door Closed Locking .............................. 2-1 1
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2.12
Lockout Protection ........................................ 2.13
Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2.13
Dual Sliding Doors . ...................................... 2.13
Power Sliding Door PSD) .............................. 2.16
Liftgate ................. ......................................2.22
Windows ................. ...................................... 2.24
Power Windows ..... ...................................... 2.25
Power Rear Quarter Windows ........................ 2.26
Sun Visors ................................................... 2-26
Theft-Deterrent Systems .................................. 2.27
ContentTheft-Deterrent . . ....................2.27
PASS-Key@Ill ................... ............2.29
PASS-Key@Ill Operation ....2.30
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2.32
New Vehicle Break-In .................................... 2.32
Ignition Positions .............. ..........2-32
Starting Your Engine ..................................... 2-34
Engine Coolant Heater .................................. 2-35
Automatic Transaxle Operation ....................... 2-36
Parking Brake ..............................................2-39
Shifting Into Park (P) ..................................... 2-40
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-42
Parking Over Things That Burn ....................... 2-43
Engine Exhaust ............................................ 2-43
Running Your Engine While You AreParked .......2-44
Mirrors ........................................................... 2-45
Manual Rearview Mirror ................ ..........2-45
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-45
Outside Convex Mirror ................................... 2-46
Outside Heated Mirrors .................................. 2-46
Onstar@ System ............................................. 2-47
HomeLink@Transmitter ................................... 2-49
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ...........2-50
2-1
 Section 2 Features and Controls

Storage Areas ................................................ 2.54 Vehicle Personalization ................................. .2.62

Glove Box ................................................... 2.54
Cupholder(s) ................................................ 2.54
Compact Overhead Console ........................ 2.54
Overhead
Console ................. ................2.55
Front Seat Storage Net ...... ...................2.55
Luggage Carrier ........................................... 2.56
Rear Storage Area ........................................ 2.58
Convenience Net .......................................... 2.59
Convenience Center ...................................... 2.60
Entering ProgrammingMode ........................ .2.63
Delayed Illumination and
Exit Lighting ........................................... .2.63
AutomaticDoorLocks ................................. .2.64
Last Door Locking and Lockout Deterrent ....... .2.65
Remote Driver Unlock Control ...................... .2.66
Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation ........... .2.67
Content Theft-Deterrent System .................... .2.69
Arming and Disarming the Content
Theft-Deterrent System ............................. .2.70
Exiting Programming Mode ........................... .2.71
MemorySeat ............................................. .2.72

2-2
Keys

2-3
 This key can be used for
the ignition as well as all
door locks, the liftgate
lock and the storage
compartments.
If you need a new key, contact your dealer, who can
obtain the correct key code.
Your vehicle has the PASS-Key@Ill vehicle theft
system. The key has a transponder in the key head that
matches a decoder in the vehicle’s steering column.
If a replacement key or any additional key is needed,
you must purchase this key from your dealer. The key
will have PK3 stamped on it. Keep the bar code tag that
came with the original keys. Give this tag to your
dealer if you need a new key made.
2-4
Any new PASS-Key@Ill key must be programmed
before it will start your vehicle. See PASS-Kep 111 on
page 2-29 for more information on programming
your new key.
Notice: Your vehicle has a number of features
that can help prevent theft. You can have a lot of
trouble getting into your vehicle if you ever lock
your keys inside. You may even have to damage
your vehicle to get in. So be sure you have
spare keys.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-5 for more information.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Onstar@system
with an active subscription and you lock your keys inside
the vehicle, Onstar@may be able to send a command
to unlock your vehicle. See OnStap System on
page 2-47 for more information.
Remote Keyless Entry System
If equipped, the keyless entry system operates on a
radio frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
e Check the distance. You may be too far from your
vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
e Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
e Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See "Battery Replacement" under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-6.
e If you are still having trouble, see your dealer or
a qualified technician for service.
Remote Keyless Entry System When you use your remote keyless entry transmitter to
unlock your vehicle or to operate the power sliding
Operation door(s), the parking lamps will flash to let you know the
command was received.
You can lock and unlock If you would like to change the way the parking lamps
your doors and the liftgate operate with remote unlock confirmation, see Vehicle
from about 3 feet (1 m) Personalization on page2-62.
up to 30 feet (9 m)
away using the remote LOCK: To lock all doors, press LOCK on the remote
keyless entry transmitter keyless entry transmitter. See Power Door Locks
supplied with your vehicle. on page 2-10 for more details on the power door lock
features. With the content theft-deterrent system,
the LOCK button may arm the system. See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page2-27 for more details.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter to
lock your vehicle, the parking lamps will flash to let you
know the command has been received. If you press
the LOCK button again, within five seconds, the horn will
UNLOCK: When you press UNLOCK on the remote
sound and the parking lamps will flash to let you know
keyless entry transmitter, only the driver’s door will the vehicle is already locked.
unlock. If you press UNLOCK again within five seconds,
all the doors and the liftgate will unlock. If you would If you would like to change the way the parking lamps
like all the doors to unlock the first time you press and horn operate with remote lock confirmation,
UNLOCK, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62. see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.

With the content theft-deterrent system, the UNLOCK

button on the remote keyless entry transmitter will
disarm the system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-27 for more details.

2-6
Remote Alarm
When you press the button with the horn symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter, the parking lamps
will flash and the horn will sound. This will allow you to
attract attention, if needed.
Press the panic button again to stop the alarm from
sounding.
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation
If your vehicle hasthe power sliding door, your remote
keyless entry transmitterwill have a button that has a van
symbol on it. Press it to open or close the sliding door.
See Power SlidingDoor (PSD) on page 2-16.
If your vehicle has the dual power sliding doors, your
remote keyless entry transmitter will have two buttons
that have a van symbol on them. The van symbol on the
left is for the driver’s side sliding door and the van
symbol on the right is for the passenger’s side sliding
door. See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on page 2-16.
If the power sliding door(s) is locked, first unlock all
doors, then press the van symbol to open the power
sliding door(s). The parking lamps will flash when
the right button with the van symbol is pressed and they
will not flash when the left button with the van symbol
is pressed. Press the vansymbol again to close the
sliding door(s). See Power Sliding Door (PSD) on
page 2-16 for more information.
You can operate the power sliding door(s) with the
remote keyless entry transmitter only when the power
sliding door override switch(es) on the overhead
console is turned off. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page 2-16.
If your vehicle’s fuel filler door is opened, the driver’s side
power sliding door will notopen completely. Do not try to
force the door. Once the fuel filler door is closed, the
driver’s side sliding door can be opened normally.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded the
new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
L
.
+ ^ . . I .----- :.LL--- --L-L^--I I- :A
IUUI LI a1 1 3 1 I IILLGI 3 I I I ~ L C IIGU
I LV 11.
See yourdealer to match transmitters to another vehicle.
2-7
Battery Replacement 1. Insert a flat object like a coin into the slot on the
side of the transmitter and twist it to separate the
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless halves.
entry transmitter should last about three years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter won’t
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it’s probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.

2. Gently pry the battery out of the transmitter. Do not

use the metal flanges to pop out the battery.
3. Replace the battery.
4. Reassemble the transmitter. Make sure the halves
are snapped together tightly so water will not get in.
5. Press and hold the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons for
seven seconds to synchronize the transmitter.
6. Check the transmitter operation.

2-8
 Doors and Locks
Locks
pAAu
I unlocked door when you slow down or
U x k e d doors can be angerous.
Passengers - especially children - can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked,
the handle won't open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors aren't locked.So,
wear safety belts properly and lock the
doors whenever you drive.
Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
s ~ f f ennrmannnt
r
P" "-'1-'
*."-s---.- ---
inilwinc ~r p g n + ~ f h
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Outsiders can easily enter through an
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors can
help prevent this from happening.
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, use your key or the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
To unlock either front door from the outside .with the
key, insert the key and turn it toward the front of
the vehicle. If your vehicle has power door locks,
you can unlock all of the doors and the liftgate by
inserting the key, turning it toward the front of the
vehicle and holding it there for one second. To lock
either front door from the outside with your key insert the
key 2nd turn it tn?ncxc! the re2r e! the ?/ehIc!e.!f yxrr
vehicle has power door locks, all of the doors will unlock
when you insert the key and turn it toward the rear of
the vehicle.
2-9

From the inside, use the manual or power door locks.
To unlock either front door from the inside, pull back
on the manual lever. To lock either front door from the
inside, push the manual lever forward.
2-10
Power Door Locks
From the inside, press the front of the power door lock
switch (on either front door) to unlock all doors and
the liftgate. With the content theft-deterrent system, the
power door lock switch will not unlock the doors until
the system is disarmed. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-27 for more details.
You can lock all doors and the liftgate from the inside
by pressing the rear of the power lock switch on
either front door. With thecontent theft-deterrent system,
the power door lock switch may cause the system to
arm. See Content Theft-Deterrenton page 2-27 for
more details.
Also, when the doors are locked with the power door
locks, the inside as well as the outside door handle
cannot open the doors. This safety feature prevents a
door from being accidentally opened from the inside
by moving the handle.
To override this safety feature, unlock the door you
want to open.
When the liftgate has been unlocked with the power
door locks, you won’t need the key to open it. Simply
squeeze the handle located above the license plate.
This is also true if you use the remote keyless entry
transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry System on
page 2-5.
Last Door Closed Locking
The last door closed locking feature will delay the power
locking of the doors and liftgate for up to five seconds
after exiting the vehicle, when the power door lock
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is used to lock your vehicle.
To cancel this delay, press the power door lock
switch or the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter a second time immediately.
If any door OF the liftgate is open when locking the
vehicle, three chimes will be heard signaling that last
door closed locking is being used. Five seconds after the
last door is closed, all of the doors will lock.
If the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY, this feature
will not lock the doors.
To turn the last door closed locking feature off or on,
see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.
2-11
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
All of the doors will lock automatically when you move
your shift lever out of PARK (P). All doors will unlock
automatically when the ignition is turned off while
the shift lever is in PARK (P).
If someone needs to get out while you are not in
PARK (P), have that person use the manual lever or
the power door lock switch. When the door is closed
again, it will not lock automatically. Use the manual
lever or the power door lock switch to lock the door.
To change the way automatic door locks operate,
see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.
With the automatic door locks feature, you can lock or
unlock the doors at any time, either manually or
using the power door lock switches.
Sliding Door Delayed Locking
If either sliding door is open when you use the power
door locks to lock the vehicle, the sliding door that
is open will not lock. Normally the last door closed
locking feature will be used to lock the sliding door after
it has been closed.
When the ignition is on or if the last door closed locking
feature has been overridden or programmed to be
off, the sliding door delayed locking feature will lock your
sliding door for you. Three seconds after a sliding
door is closed, all the doors will lock.

2-12
Lockout Protection
The lockout protection feature makes it difficult for you
to lock your keys in your vehicle. If the driver’s door
is open while the keys are in the ignition, a chime will
sound and you will not be able to use your power
door lock switch to lock the vehicle.
If you don’t leave thekeys in the ignition or if you use the
manual door lock, youcould still lock your keys in your
vehicle. Always rememberto take your keys with you.
To turn this feature off or on, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 2-62.
Leaving Your Vehicle
If you are leaving the vehicle, take your keys, open your
door and set the locks from the inside. Then get out
and close the door.
Dual Sliding Doors
To open either sliding door from outside the vehicle, pull
the handle out and then pull the door toward the rear.
If you slide the door all the way back, the door will rest in
a detent position.
To move the door forward, you must first pull the door
past the open detent position.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open only a
little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens, don’ttry
to force the sliding door. Just close the driver’s side
sliding door. Then when the fuel filler door is closed,
the driver’s side sliding door can beopened normally.
2-13
Sliding Door Lock

If your vehicle is facing downward on a steep

grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door
does not slam shut be sure to holdit open
until everyone is clear of the door,'and only
then allow it to slowly close.

2-14
 Sliding Door Security Lock
Your vehicle is equipped with a sliding door security
lock that helps prevent young children or other
passengers from opening the sliding door(s) using the
inside door handle. To use one of these locks, do
the following:
1. Open the sliding door.
2. On the inside of the
n 7 sliding door(s), on the
front edge of the
door will be a lock.
Push the lever
up to engage the lock.

Lock either sliding door from

inside the vehicle by moving
the manual lever down. Unlock it by moving the lever up.
With the power door locks,the sliding door lock has a
delay feature. See Power Door Locks on page 2-10 and
Vehicle Personalizationon page 2-62.

3. Close the door.

4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.

2-15
If your vehicle has the power sliding door(s), you can
override the security lock by pressing either power door
lock switch when the power sliding door override
switch(es) is turned off. When the power sliding door
override switch(es) is turned on, the power sliding
door(s) cannot be opened from the inside when the
sliding door security lock is in use.
If you want to open the sliding door when the security
lock is on, unlock and open the door from the outside.
You should let adults and older children know how
the security lock works, and how to cancel the lock.
If you don’t, adults or older children who ride in the rear
won’t be able to open the sliding door from the inside
when the security lock feature is in use.
Canceling the Sliding Door
Security Lock
1. Unlock the sliding door and open the door from
the outside.
2. Push the security lock lever all the way down.
3. Close the door.
4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other door.
The sliding door lock will now work normally.
2-16
Power Sliding Door (PSD)
If your vehicle has this feature,you can open and close
the sliding door(s) using the switches inside
of your
vehicle. You can also operate the power sliding door(s)
with your remote keyless entry transmitter.See Remote
Keyless Entry System on page 2-5.
Leaving your children or pets unattended in
your vehicle can be dangerous. They could
operate the power sliding door. A child or
others could be injured. Do not leave children
or pets unattended in your vehicle.
To help avoid accidental operation of the sliding door(s),
press the part of the power sliding door override
switch(es) with the don’t symbol.
To open or close the sliding door(s), press and release If you have the dual sliding
one of the following power door switches. doors, your vehicle has
these switches. The left
switch is for the driver’s
side power sliding door and
the right switch is for the
passenger’s side sliding
door. The power sliding
door and the power sliding

.3
door override is one switch.

~~~

Pressing the part of the switch(es) withthe don’t symbol

Power Sliding Door Power Sliding Door turns the power to the sliding door(s) off. When the power
Override sliding door(s) is off, you will not beable to open the
door(s) by using the power sliding door switch(es) located
If you have the one power sliding door, these switches on the overhead console switchbank, using the switch in
are located in the overhead console switchbank. front of the driver’s or the passenger’s side sliding door,
or using the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Nofice: When your vehicle goes through an
automatic car wash, be sure the power sliding
door is turned off. If it isn’t, the power sliding door
may open accidentally.

2-17
 This switch is in front
of the driver’s or the
passenger’s side
sliding door.
The power sliding door override switch(es) will also stop
the door(s) immediately, while the door(s) is opening
or closing, when the override switch(es) is turned on.
The power sliding door(s) will only open if the transaxle
is in PARK (P). The transaxle does not have to be in
PARK (P) to close the door(s).
2-18
if the power sliding door(s) is open or in the process
of closing when you shift out of PARK (P), a buzzer will
sound. This is a warning that the sliding door(s) is
not completely closed.
If the power to the sliding door(s) is turned off, the
buzzer will not sound indicating the door(s) is not
completely closed.
Ifyouiftthetransaxle t of PAR [P) and
~
accelerate before the power sliding door
latches closed, the door may reverse to the
open position. A child or others could fall out
of the vehicle and be injured. Alwaysmake
sure the power sliding door is closed and
latched before you driveaway.

If anobjectobstructsthe power sliding door(s) while
it is closing, the door will automatically reverse to
the open position, provided it meets sufficient resistance.
Resistancemustbeas strong as the forceof the
closing door, or stronger. The force of the closing door
increasessignificantlyas the door approaches the
iaichea posiiion.
The driver’s side sliding door is designed to open
only a little if the fuel door is open. If this ever happens,
don’t try to force the sliding door. When the fuel filler
door is closed, the driver’s side sliding door can
be opened normally.
You or others could be injured if caught in the
path of the sliding door. Make sure the door
path is clear before closing the door.
If you want to open the power sliding door(s) when the
override switch(es) is turned off, pull the inside or
outside handle and let go. The door will open fully.
To open the power sliding door(s) when the power
sliding door override switch(es) is on, pull the inside or
outside handle and slide the door all the way back.
2-19
 If your vehicle is facing c-- vnward on a steep
grade (15 percent or more), the door may not
stay open and could slam shut, possibly
injuring someone. To make sure the door does
not slam shut, turn on the power sliding door
feature. Then if the door closes, it will close
under the control of the power door system.

If you want to close the power sliding door(s) when

the override switch(es) is turned off, pull the inside or
outside handle or the edge of the door. Move the
door about 4 inches (10 cm) toward the closed position
and release it. The door will close completely and
latch for you.
To close the power sliding door(s) when the override
switch(es) is turned on, pull the inside or outside handle
and slide the door all the way forward to the latched
position.

2-20
Resetting the Power Sliding Door 4. Remove fuse 29 from the underhood fuse block.
Leave it out for 30 seconds.
The power sliding door may operate incorrectly or not
at all because of the following conditions: 5. Reinstall the fuse and wait 10 seconds.

e A low voltage or dead battery, 6. Turn the power sliding door override switch on.
7. Press either of the power door lock switches to open
disconnectingthebattery,or
the power sliding door.
if the instrument panel PWR/HEATED SEAT PSD 8. Open the door all of the way.
fuse or the underhood fuse 8, 27 or 29 are
removed or blown. 9. Wait five seconds and close the door by pressing
either power door lock switch.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96 for more
information about your fuse panel. IO. Wait five seconds and repeat Steps 7 through 9.
If any of these conditions occur, the power sliding door If the door does not rest in the fully open position
will need to be reset. If your vehicle has the dual after repeating Step 7 , repeat Steps 7 through 9 again.
power sliding doors, both doors will have to be reset. If the door still does not operate correctly, see your
To do this: dealer for service.
1. Check to be sure the power sliding door is unlocked
and securely closed.
2. Turn the ignition key to OFF.
3. !f en, t ~ r r the
n pnwer slidin? door override switch off.

2-2 1
Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate from the outside, turn the key in
the cylinder clockwise or use the remote keyless
entry transmitter. To lock the liftgate using the key,
turn the key counterclockwise.
Open the liftgate using the handle located above the
license plate. Once slightly opened, the liftgate will rise
by itself. Lamps in the rear of the vehicle will come
on, illuminating the rear cargo area. See lnterior Lamps
on page 3-17.
Notice: Be sure there are no overhead
obstructions, such as a garage door, before you
open the liftgate. You could slam the liftgate
into something and break the glass.
2-22
It can be dangerous to drive w the liftgate
~~~
open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can
come into yourvehicle. You can’t see or smell
CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even
death. If you must drive with the liftgate open
or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
between the body and the liftgate:
Make sure all other windowsare shut.
Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
system to its highest speed and select the
control setting that will force outside air
into your vehicle. See “Comfort Controls”
in the Index.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See “Engine Exhaust” in the Index.
To close the liftgate, pull down on the handle, then
firmly shut the liftgate. Don’t drive with the liftgate open,
even slightly. See Engine Exhaust on page 2-43.
A message in your instrument panel cluster will warn
you if the liftgate is not completely closed. See
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message on page 3-58.

2-23
 indows

Leaving children in a vehicle with the windows

closed is dangerous. A child can be overcome
by the extreme heat and can suffer permanent
injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never
leave a child alone in a vehicle, especially with
the windows closed in warm or hot weather.

2-24
Power Windows The driver’s power window switch has two down
positions. The first position lowers the window normally.
To raise the window, pull up the front of the switch.
Express-Down Window
To activate the express-down feature, push the AUTO
switch all the way down to the second position, then
release it. The window will lower completely. To stop the
window from lowering all the way, pull up on the front
of the switch.

The switches on the driver’s door armrest control

the front windows when the ignition is in RUN,
ACCESSORY or when Retained Accessory Power
(RAP) is active. See “Retained Accessory Power (RAP)”
^ I _ .~ I ..AI-.- “--:a:--- ^ - ----
ulluw ryriilrurr r - u w w r r ~U I I pdye L-JL.
rl 00

2-25
Power Rear Quarter Windows Press the part of the switch with the symbol to close
both windows. The windows can be closed fully or
Your vehicle may have power rear quarter windows. partway depending on how long the switch is pressed.
The ignition must be in RUN, ACCESSORY or
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active, to
the overhead console
use the power rear quarter windows. See “Retained
switchbank, is used
Accessory Power (RAP)” under lgnition Positions
for opening and closing
on page 2-32.
the power rear quarter
windows.
Sun Visors
To block out glare, you can swing down the visors.
You can also remove them from the center mount and
swing them to the side.
Visor Vanity Mirror
Pull down the sun visor. You will see the vanity mirror.
Press the textured part of the switch to open the Lighted Vanity Mirror
windows; both windows will open. The windows will
continue to open as long as the switch is pressed until Pull down the sun visor. Flip up the cover to expose the
they are fully opened. vanity mirror. The lamps will come on when you open
the cover.

2-26
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make it
impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a theft-deterrent alarm system.
A light located on top of your instrument panel (near the
center of the vehicle, next to the windshield) will flash
slowly to let you know that the system has been armed.
While armed, the doors will not unlock with the power
door lock switch.
Once armed, the alarm will go off if someone tries to
enter the vehicle (without using the remote keyless entry
transmitter or a key) or turns the ignition to ON. The
horn will sound and the parking lamps will flash for up to
two minutes.
When the alarm is armed, the liftgate may be opened
with the remote keyless entry transmitter or with a key.
Arming with the Power Lock Switch
Your alarm system will arm when you use either power
door lock switch to lock the doors while any door or the
liftgate is open and the key is removed from the ignition.
If you would like to turn on power door lock switch arming,
see Vehicle Personalizationon page 2-62.
When the security light flashes quickly the system is
ready to arm with the power door lock switches.
Then the security light will stop flashing and stay on
when you press the rear of the power door lock switch,
tc ]et ;‘cs k~s;~ithe s y s t e ~is srm.jnn f t n r E!! &mrs
3- ‘A.‘--.
and the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light
will begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know
the system is armed.
2-27
Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
Transmitter
Your alarm system will arm when you use your remote
keyless entry transmitter to lock the doors, if the key
is not in the ignition. The security light will turn on to let
you know the system is arming. After all doors and
the liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know
the system is armed.
Arming with Your Key
Your alarm system will arm when you use your key to
lock the doors. The security light will turn on to let
you know the system is arming. After all doors and the
liftgate are closed and locked, the security light will
begin flashing at a very slow rate to let you know the
system is armed. If you would like your key not to
arm the system, see Vehicle Personalization on
page 2-62.
2-28
Arming Confirmation
If remote unlock confirmation is on, your parking lamps
will flash briefly to let you know when your alarm system
has disarmed. If you would notlike the parking lampsto
flash, see Vehicle Personalization on page 2-62.
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Entry Transmitter
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your
remote keyless entry transmitter to unlock the doors.
The security light will stop flashing to let you know the
system is no longer armed.
Disarming with Your Key
Your alarm system will disarm when you use your key to
unlock the doors. The securitylight will stop flashing to let
you know the system is no longer armed.If you wouldlike
your key not to disarm the alarm system, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 2-62.
PASS-Key@111
Your PASS-Key@ Ill system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept anyinterference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key@ Ill uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in your vehicle.
2-29
PASS-Key@111 Operation
Your vehicle is equipped
with the PASS-Key@Ill
(Personalized Automotive
Security System)
theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key@Ill is a passive
theft deterrent system.
This means you don’t have
to do anything different
to arm or disarm the
system. It works when you
insert or remove the key
from the ignition.
When the PASS-Key@Ill system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it shuts down the vehicle’s
starter and fuel systems. The starter will not work and
fuel will stop being delivered to the engine. Anyone
using a trial-and-error method to start the vehicle will be
discouraged because of the high number of electrical
key codes.
2-30
If the engine does not start and the security message
comes on, the key may have a damaged transponder.
Turn the ignition off and try again.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time,
you may also want to check the instrument panel PASS
KEY fuse. If the engine still does not start with the
other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle
does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer or
a locksmith who can service the PASS-Key@Ill to
have a new key made. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers
on page 5-96.
It is possible for the PASS-Key@Ill decoder to learn
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 additional keys may be programmed for
the vehicle. This procedure is for learning additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are lost
or do not operate, you must see your dealer or a
locksmith who can service PASS-Key@Ill to have keys
made and programmed to the system.
See your dealer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key@Ill to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
Canadian Owners: If you lose or damage your keys,
only a GM dealer can service PASS-Key@Ill to have
new keys made. To program additional keys you
will need two current driver’s keys (black in color).
You must add a step to the following procedure.
After Step 3 repeat Steps 1 through 3 with the second
current driver’s key. Then continue with Step 4.
To program the new key:
1. Verify the new key has PK3 stamped on it.
2. Insert the ignition key in the ignition and start the
engine. If the engine will not start see your dealer
for service.
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to OFF
and remove the key.
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to RUN
within 10 seconds of removing the previous key.
5. The security message will turn off once the key has
been programmed. It may not be apparent that the
security message went on due to how quickly
the key is programmed.
6. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you are ever driving and the security message comes
on and stays on, you will be able to restart your
engine if you turn it off. Your PASS-Key@ Ill system,
however, is not working properly and must be serviced
by your dealer. Your vehicle is not protected by the
PASS-Key@Ill system at this time.
If you lose or damage a PASS-Key@Ill key, see your
dealer or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key@Ill to
have a new key made.
2-3 1
Starting and Operating Your Ignition Positions
Vehicle With the key in the ignition, you can turn it to five
different positions.

New Vehicle Break-In A

Notice: Your vehicle doesn’t need an elaborate

“break-in.” But it will perform better in the long run
if you follow these guidelines:
-
Don’t drive at any one speed fast or
slow - for the first500 miles (805 km).
Don’t make full-throttle starts.
Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322km) or so. During this time your new A E
brake linings aren’t yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
A (ACCESSORY): This is the position in which you can
Don’t tow a trailer during break-in. See “Towing
operate your electrical accessories. Press in the ignition
a Trailer” in the Index for more information. switch as you turn thetop of the key toward you.

2-32
B (LOCK): This is the only position from which you
can remove the key. This position locks your ignition,
steering wheel and transaxle.
Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK and you
can’t turn it, be sure you are using the correct key;
if so, is it all the way in? If it is, then turn the
steering wheel left and right while you turn the key
hard. Turn the key only with your hand. Using a
tool to force it could break the key or the ignition
switch. If noneof these works, then your vehicle
needs service.
C (OFF): This position unlocks the ignition, steering
wheel and transaxle but, does not send power to
any accessories. Use this position if your vehicle
must be pushed or towed, but never try to push-start
your vehicle.
D (RUN): This is the position to which the switch returns
after you start your engine and release the ignition key.
This is the position for driving. Even when the engine is
not running, you can use RUN to operate yourelectrical
accessories and to display some instrument panel
warning lights.
E (START): This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the ignition key. The switch
will return to RUN for normal driving.
If the engine is not running, ACCESSORY and RUN
are positions that allow you to operate your electrical
accessories, such as the radio.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
With RAP, the power windows, power rear quarter
windows, audio system and the automatic level control
will continue to work up to 10 minutes after the
ignition key is turned to OFF and none of the doors
are opened.
2-33
Starting Your Engine
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine won’t start in any other position - that’s a
safety feature. To restart when you’re already moving,
use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Don’t try to shift to PARK (P)if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transaxle. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn your
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine warms up.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will cause your battery
to be drained much sooner. And the excessive
heat can damage your starter motor. Wait about
15 seconds between each try to help avoid draining
your battery or damaging your starter.
2-34
2. If the engine doesn’t start in 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal about one-quarter of the way
down while you turn the key to START. Do this until
the engine starts. As soon as it does, let go of
the key.
3. If your engine still won’t start (or starts but then
stops), it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to the
floor and holding it there as you hold the key in
START for a maximum of 15 seconds. This clears
the extra gasoline from the engine. If the engine
still won’t start or starts briefly but then stops again,
repeat Step 1 or 2, depending on the temperature.
When the engine starts, release the key and
the accelerator pedal.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in yourvehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you don’t, your engine
might not perform properly.
Engine Coolant Heater 3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.

Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet

could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
won’t reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sureto unplug and

store the cord as it was beforeto keep it away
Your vehicle may have anengine coolant heater. In very
from moving engine parts. If you don’t, it could be
cold weather,0°F (-1 8°C) or colder, the engine coolant
damaged.
heater can help. You’ll get easier starting
and better fuel
economy during engine warm-up. Usually,
the coolant How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
h--+-r
. .
-hhm .I& h- - 1 , me.n-~I ;c.
l l t i a l t t ~ I I V U I Uuti pluyycu I I I
-
a
-rc.n-~ I- nF4-v
.
I I I I I I I I I I U I I ~w l
v v
lwut
hew
IIUUID
8“- i n 3 Thn
I, 1 ;
m n c x L , n r
1 I I b UI 1 d V V b I
A n n n n A c n n thn
UbfJbI IUU V I I L I ,b
n l I t c i A n tnmnnvqtl l v n
VUl~lUb,bI I I y b l u L U I u,
thn
L I I”

prior to starting your vehicle. At

temperatures above kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead
32°F (OOC), use of the coolant heateris not required. of trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact
your dealer in the area where you’ll be parking your
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater vehicle. The dealer can give you the best advice for that
1. Turn off the engine. particular area.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the eieciricai cord.
The electrical cord is located on the driver’s side
of the engine compartment.
2-35
Automatic Transaxle Operation If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever - push the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then move
the shift lever into the gear you wish. See Shifting Out
of Park (P) on page 2-42.

It is dangerous to get outof your vehicle if the

Maximum engine speed is limited when you’re in
PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), to protect driveline
components from improper operation.
There are several different positions for your shift lever
PARK (P): This gear position locks your front wheels.
It’s the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle can’t move easily.
Ensure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before starting
the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift
lock control system. You haveto fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in RUN. As you step on the brake pedal,
while in PARK (P), you may hear a click from the solenoid
of the system. This ensures that the system is operating
properly.
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine is
running unless you have to. If you have left the
engine running,the vehicle can move suddenly.
You or others could be injured. To be sure your
vehicle won’tmove, evenwhen you’re on fairly
level ground, always set your parking brake and
move theshift lever toPARK (P). See “Shifting
Into Park (P)”in the Index. If you’repulling a
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer”in theIndex.

2-36
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage your transaxle.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle
is stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transaxle, see
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on
page 4-30.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesn’t
connect with the wheels.To restart when you’realready
moving, use NEUTRAL(N) only. Also, use NEUTRAL (N)
when your vehicleis being towed.
Shifting into a drivegear while your engine
“rqcjng” (running 3t high speed) i$ dangP?rQl!s
Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal,
your vehicle could move very rapidly.You
could lose control and hit people or objects.
Don’t shift into a drivegear while your engine
is racing.
Notice: Damage to your transaxle caused by
shifting into a drive gear with the engine racing
isn’t covered by your warranty.
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D): This position is for
normal driving. If you need more power for passing,
and you’re:
Going less than 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
Going about 35 mph (55 km/h) or more, push the
accelerator all the way down.
You’ll shift down to the next gear and have more power.
Notice; If your vehicle seems to start up rather
slowly, or if it seems not to shift gears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far thatway,
your vehicle can be damaged. So, if this happens,
.lave your vehicle serviced rightaway. Until then,
you can use SECOND (2) when you are driving
less than 35 mph (55 km/h) and AUTOMATIC
n \ ~ n n n ~ \In
w v L n u r l IY
n \=s-”
L tui
L:-L-”
1 utyt IC#
-.......A.
\YI apr;r?wa.
2-37
Warm-up Shift
Your vehicle has a computer controlled transaxle
designed to warm up the engine faster when the outside
temperature is 35°F (2°C) or colder. You may notice
that the transaxle will shift at a higher vehicle speed until
the engine is warmed up. This is a normal condition
designed to provide heat to the passenger compartment
and defrost the windows more quickly. See Climate
Control System on page 3-25for more information.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
but it offers more power and lower fuel economy than
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D).
Here are some times you might choose THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D):
When driving on hilly, winding roads.
When towing a trailer (so there is less shifting
between gears).
When going down a steep hill.
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power,
but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want to
use your brakes off and on.
2-38
Notice: Don’t drive inSECOND (2) for more than
25 miles (40 km), or at speeds over55 mph (90 km/h),
or you can damage your transaxle. Use THIRD(3) or
AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) as much as possible.
Don’t shift into SECOND (2) unless you are going
slower than65 mph (105 km/h) or you can damage
your engine.
Notice: If your vehicleseems to start up rather
slowly, or ifit seems notto shiftgears as you go
faster, something may be wrong with a transaxle
system sensor. If you drive very far way, thatyour
vehicle can bedamaged. So, if thishappens, have
your vehicle servicedright away. Until then, you can
use SECOND (2) when youare driving less than
35 mph (55 km/h) andTHIRD (3) for higherspeeds.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more power
(but lower fuel economy) thanSECOND (2). You can use
it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud.If the shift
lever is put in FIRST (I), the transaxle won’t downshift
into first gearuntil the vehicle is going slow enough.
Notice: If your front wheels won’tturn, don’t try to
drive. This might happen if youwere stuck in very
deep sand or mud or were up against a solid object.
You could damage your transaxle. Also, if you stop
when goinguphill, don’t hold your vehicle there with
only the acceleratorpedal. This could overheat and
damage the transaxle. Use your brakes to hold your
vehicle in position on hill.
a
Parking Brake If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will
come on. See Brake System Warning Light on
page 3-44.
The parking brake is
located on the driver’s To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
side under the pedal down with your right foot while you push down on
instrument panel. the parking brake pedal with your left foot. (To release
the tension on the parking brake cable, you will need to
apply about the same amount of pressure to the
parking brake pedal as you did when you set the parking
brake.) When you remove your foot from the parking
brake pedal, it will pop up to the released position.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can cause
your rear brakes to overheat. You may have to
replace them, and you could also damage other
parts of your vehicle.
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
down with your right foot and push down on the parking see Towing a Trailer on page 4-36, That section shows
brake pedal with your left foot. what to do first to keep the trailer from moving.

2-39
 -
Shifting Into Park (P) 2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) like this:

/ I

It can - 2 dangerou- -0 get out of your veh e

if the shift lever is not fullyin PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle won’t
move, even when you’re on fairly level ground,
use the steps that follow. If you’re pullinga
trailer, see “Towing a Trailer” in the Index.

Pull the lever toward you.

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot and
set the parking brake with your left foot.

2-40

Move the lever up as far as it will go.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the ignition key in your
hand. your vehicle is in PARK (PI.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
Engine Running
It canbedangerous to leave\w.iiclewith
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift leveris not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could beinjured. Don’t leave
I your vehicle with the engine running.
I
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After
you’ve moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold
the reguiar brake pedai down. Then, see ii you can
move the shift lever away from PARK (P) without first
pulling it toward you. If you can, it means that the
shift lever wasn’t fully locked into PARK (P).
2-41
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you don’t shift your
transaxle into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl in
the transaxle. You may find it difficult to pull the shift
lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque lock.”
To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake and
then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave the
driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting lnto Park (P)
on page 2-40.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transaxle, so you
can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-42
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lock
control system. You have to fully apply your regular
brakes before you can shift from PARK (P), when
the ignition is in RUN.
As you step on the brake pedal, while in PARK (P),
you may hear a click from the solenoid of the system.
This ensures that the system is operating properly.
See Automatic Transaxle Operation on page 2-36.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever by pushing the shift lever all the way into
PARK (P) as you maintain brake application. Then try
to move the shift lever into the gear you want. If you
ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t shift out
of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the ignition key to OFF
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the engine and then shift to the drive gear
you want.
5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as you can.
Parking Over Things That Burn Engine E> aust
.. . .

Engine exhaust can kill.

It contains the gas
carbon monoxide(CO), which you can’t see or
smell. It can cause unconsciousness and death.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
Your vehicle was damagedin a collision.
Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
0 Repairs weren’t done correctly.

0 Your vehicle or exhaust system had been

modified improperly.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust Drive it only with all the windows down to
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Don’t park blow out anyCO; and
over papers, leaves, dry grass or other things. Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
that can burn.
I
2-43
Running Your Engine While You
Are Parked
It’s better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, hpre are some things to know.
Idling the engine with the climate co~,.,ol
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier Caution under
“Engine Exhaust.”
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even
if the fan is at the highest settin:,. One place
this can happen is a garage. Exhaust - with
CO - can come in easily. NEVEt3 park in a
garage with the engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See “Winter Driving” in the Index.
2-44
Itcan De dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with
the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can
roll. Don’t leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you haveto. If you’ve left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle won’tmove, even
when you’re on fairly level ground, always set
your parking brake and move the shiftlever
to PARK (P).
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle won’t
move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-40.
If you’re pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-36.
Mirrors Turn the control counterclockwise to select the driver’s
side rearview mirror, or clockwise to select the
passenger’s side rearview mirror.
Manual Rearview Mirror Then use the control to adjust each mirror so that you
can see a little of the side of your vehicle and the
To reduce glare from lights behind you, pull the lever
area beside and behind your vehicle when you are
toward you (to the night position). To return the mirror to
the day position, push the lever away from you. sitting in a comfortable driving position.
If you are not adjusting either mirror, leave the control
in the center off position. This prevents moving the
Outside Power Mirrors mirrors accidentally once you have them adjusted.
The control located on the Both outside mirrors can be folded forward or rearward.
driver’s door operates both In the rearward position, they will fold almost flush
outside rearview mirrors. with the vehicle. This feature is particularly useful in
automatic car washes.

2-45
Outside Convex Mirror
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
Outside Heated Mirrors
If your vehicle has the outside rearview mirrors, they are
heated when you activate the rear window defogger.
See “Rear Window Defogger” in Climate Control System
on page 3-25.

A convex mirror can make things (like other

vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
I

2-46
Onstar@System Onstar@Services
Onstar@Drovides a number of service plans. Some of
the services currently provided by OnStap are:
e Automatic Notification of Air Bag Deployment
Emergency Services
Roadside Assistance Stolen Vehicle Tracking
AccidentAssist
Remote Door Unlock
Onstar@ uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite Remote Diagnostics
technology, wireless communications, and call centers
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security, Onstar@MED-NET (Requires separate activation
information and convenienceservices. An Onstar@ and annual fee on some plans)
subscription plan is included in the price of your vehicle. Online and Personal Concierge Services
You can upgrade or extend your Onstar@services to
meet your needs. Route Support
A complete OnStap user’s guide and the terms and RideAssist
conditions of the Onstar@Subscription Service Information and Convenience Services
Agreement are included in your vehicle’s glove box
iiterature. For more iniormaiion, visii www.msiar.cwrl,
contact Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827),
or press the blue Onstar@button to speak to an
Onstar@24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

2-47
Onstar@Personal Calling
With Onstar@Personal Calling, you have a safer way to
stay connected while driving. It’s a hands-free wireless
phone that’s integrated into your vehicle. Youcan place
calls nationwide using voice-activated dialing with no
contracts, no roamingcharges and no access fees.
To find out more about Onstar@Personal Calling, refer to
the Onstar@user’s guide in your vehicle’s glove box, or
call Onstar@at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
2-48
Onstar@Virtual Advisor
With Onstar@Virtual Advisor you can listen to the news,
entertainment and informative topics, such as traffic
and weather reports. You are able to listen and reply to
your e-mail through your vehicle’s speakers.
A completed Subscription Service Agreement is required
prior to delivery of Onstar@services and prepaid
calling minutes are also required for Onstar@Personal
Calling and Onstar@Virtual Advisor use. Terms and
conditions of the Subscription Service Agreement can be
found at www.onstar.com.
 an authorized service facility could void authorization
HomeLink, a combined universal transmitter and to use this equipment.
receiver, provides a way to replace up to three
hand-held transmitters used to activate devices such
as gate operators, garagedoor openers, entry door
locks, security systems and home lighting. Additional
HomeLink information can be found on the internet
--- - - A -

at www.nomeiink.com or by caiiing i -uuu-333-~3I 3.

2-49
Programming the HomeLink
Transmitter
Do not use the HomeLink@Transmitter with any garage
door opener that does not have the “stop and reverse”
feature. This includes any garage door opener model
manufactured before April 1, 1982.
Keep the original transmitter for use in other vehicles as
well as for future HomeLink@ programming.It is also
recommended that upon the sale of the vehicle,
the programmed HomeLink@buttons should be erased
for security purposes. Refer to “Erasing HomeLink@
Buttons” or, for assistance, contact HomeLink@ on
the internet at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the garage
door or gate operator you are programming. When
programming a garage door, it is advised to park outside
of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio frequency.
2-50
Your vehicle’s engine should be turned off while
programming the transmitter. Follow these steps to
program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons,
releasing only when the indicator light begins to
flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/orthird
transmitter to the remaining two HomeLink@ buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink@
buttons while keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
button on HomeLink@ andthe hand-held transmitter
button. Do not release the buttons until Step 4
has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to substitute Step 3 with the procedure
noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after HomeLink@successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained HomeLink@button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the HomeLink@button is pressed and
released.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons,
begin with Step2 under “Programming HomeLink@.”
Do not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device
(most commonly, a garage door opener).
6. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-head
unit) in the garage, locate the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. This can usually be found where the hanging
antenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed HomeLink@button for two seconds,
then release. Repeat the press/hold/release
sequence a second time, and depending on the
brand of the garage door opener (or other rolling
code device), repeat this sequence a third time
to complete the programming.
HomeLink@should now activate your rolling code
equipped device.
To program the remaining two HomeLink@buttons,
begin with Step 2 of “Programming HomeLink@.”
Do not repeat Step 1.
2-51
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to “time out” or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for
HomeLink@to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured to
“time out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming agate operator by using the “Programming
HomeLink@” procedures(regardless of where you live),
replace Step 3 under “Programming HomeLink@’with
the following:
Continue to press and hold the HomeLink@button while
you press and release every two seconds (cycle)
your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signal has
been successfully accepted by HomeLinkO. The
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming HomeLink@“
to complete.
2-52
Using HomeLink@
Press and hold the appropriate HomeLink@ button for
at least half of a second. The indicator light will come on
while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing HomeLink@ Buttons
To erase programming from the three buttons do the
following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longer than
30 seconds.
HomeLink@is now in the train (learning) mode and can
be programmed at any time beginning with Step 2
under “Programming HomeLink@.”
Individual buttons can not be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single
HomeLink@Button” next.
Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@
Button
To program a device to HomeLink@using a HameLink@
button previously trained, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink@button.
Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the HomeLink@
button, proceed with Step 2 under “Programming
HomeLink@.”
Resetting Defaults
To reset HomeLink@to default settings do the following:
1. Hold down the two outside buttons for about
20 seconds until the indicator light begins to flash.
2. Continue to hold both buttons until the HomeLink@
indicator light turns off.
3. Release both buttons.
For questions or comments, contact HomeLink@at
1-800-355-3515, or on the internet at
www.homelink.com.
2-53
Storage Areas
Your vehicle's large carrying capacity can store many
items. If you have the extended wheelbase version, you
can carry things as large as a 4' x 8' piece of plywood.
You can also use the floor pins that are usedto
attach the seats, to secure larger loads.
Your vehicle also has cupholders on the bottom inboard
side of the second row driver's side captain's chairs
and the seatbacks have cupholders that can be
used when the seatbacks are folded forward.
Compact Overhead Console

Glove Box
Your vehicle has a glove box below the instrument
panel. To open the glove box, lift the latch release.
The glove box door has a detent to prevent the door
from lowering too far. Open the glove box until the door
is partway open, then pull the door down if you need
it fully open. To close the glove box, the door must
be pushed up past the detent.

Cupholder(s)
There are cupholders located below the center
instrument panel switchbank. The cupholders have a
removable liner for larger size cups and for cleaning The front overhead console includes two reading lamps,
the cupholders. a storage compartment and a switchbank.
To use the cupholders, simply pull out the tray.
Keep the tray stowed in when not in use.

2-54
Overhead Console Front Seat Storage Net

There may be a storage net that stretches between the

front seats. Pull the hooks towards the passenger’s
seat and insert them into the holes.
Your vehicle may have this feature. The front overhead
consoie has reaciirly ianlps, a swi\iiici-,Gaiik, s k r s g ~
compartments, Onstar@System buttons, Driver
Information Center (DIC) and HomeLink@Transmitter
When not in use, it is recommended that you unhook
buttons. For information on the features listed see each
the net to extend its life and retain its elasticity.
of them in the Index.

2-55
Luggage Carrier

If you try to carry somethingon top of your

vehicle that is longer or wider than the luggage
carrier - like paneling, plywood, a mattress
and so forth - the wind can catch itas you
drive along. This can cause you to lose
control. What you are carrying could be
violently torn off, and this could cause you or
other drivers to havea collision, and of course
damage your vehicle. You may be able to carry
something like this inside. But, never carry If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things
something longer or wider than the luggage on top of your vehicle. The luggage carrier has side rails
carrier on top of your vehicle. attached to the roof, as well as sliding crossrails and
places to use for tying things down. These let you load
some things on top of your vehicle, as long as they
are not wider or longer than the luggage carrier.

2-56
 When you carry cargo on the luggage carrier of a
proper size and weight, put it on the slats, as far fowa.rd
as you can. Then slide the crossrail up against the
rear of the load, to help keep it from moving. You can
then tie it down.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-34.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re driving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage
carrier and cargo are still securely fastened.

Notice: Loading cargo that weighs more than

150 Ibs. (68 kg) on the luggage carrier may damage
your vehicle.

2-57
 Your luggage carrier has
release knobs set in the
ends of each crossrail.

Turn the release knob counterclockwise to unlock the

crossrails. Slide the crossrails forward or back, as
needed, to accommodate loads of various sizes.
After repositioning the crossrails, be sure to tighten the
release knobs by turning them clockwise. This will
lock the crossrails in place.
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle has a storage compartment and may
have a cupholder on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
next to the third row seat(s).

2-58
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net. The
convenience net is designed to help keep small loads,
like grocery bags, from falling over. Install the
convenience net at the rearof your vehicle,
inside the liftgate.
To use the convenience net, do the following:
1. Attach the upper loops to the posts on either side
of the liftgate opening. The label on the net should
be in the upper left-hand corner.
2. Attach the lower hooks to the metal rings on thefloor.
3. Once you’ve loaded items into the net, stretch the
higher side of the net up and over the top of the
load to hold it firmly in place.
The convenience net has a maximum capacity of
100 Ibs. (45kg). It is not designed to hold larger, heavier
loads. Store such loads on the floor of your vehicle,
as far forward as you can.
When not in use, it is recommended that you take down
the convenience net to extend the life of the net and
to help retain its elasticity, and to keep the rear
exit clear.
2-59
Convenience Center
If a.., removable convenience item isn’t
secured properly, it can move around in a
collision or sudden stop. People in the vehicle
could be injured. Be sure to secure any such
item properly.
Your vehicle may have a convenience center. It comes
with the stowable seat. It provides extra storage
space for the rear of the vehicle.
To open the convenience center, pull up on the door latch
located in the front. The convenience center cover has
two automatic prop rods to hold it up and in place.
To close the convenience center cover you must pull
one of the prop rod linkages toward you while holding
onto the door latch and lower the convenience
center cover to close it.
2-60
Removing the Convenience Center
1. Make sure that all items are off of the convenience
center and that it is empty.
2. Turn the hand knob counterclockwise until the knob
is loose.
3. Lift up on the hand knob to grab a hold of the
convenience center.
4. Lift up on the convenience center while pulling it
toward you and pull it out.
Replacing the Convenience Center
1. Make sure the stowable seat is properly installed in
the vehicle. See Stowable Seat on page 1-78for
more information. If the stowable seat is not in
the vehicle with the convenience center, the
convenience center will not be locked into the
correct position in the vehicle.
2. Make sure that the convenience center is closed.
3. Lift the convenience center up and into the rear
of the vehicle.
 The tray sill can be folded down onto the stowable seat
to close the space between the two when the stowable
seat is folded down. To do this, flip the sill plate up
and over toward the stowable seat.
The cover of the convenience center can be left in its
upright position while the vehicle is moving.
The convenience center has six hooks on the inside

I\ cover for hanging items on. The prop rods can hold
up to 49 Ibs. (21.8 kg) on the cover of the convenience
center while in its upright position.
The convenience center and the stowable seat both
have a maximum weight capacity of 400 Ibs. (181.6 kg).
I ’ Nofice: Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail because of overloading.
4. Put the tray sill, located on the back of the
convenience center, in the upright position.
5. Slide the convenience center in and align it so that
the forks, located on the bottom rear of the
convenience center, slide into the seat anchors.
6 . PESS dc>jc?c ? n the frnnt cf the ccnv~niencecenter
so the center locates on the sill mounting bracket.
7. Turn the hand knob clockwise until it is tight.
8. Pull up on the convenience center to make sure it
is locked into place.

2-6 1
Vehicle Personalization
Your vehicle’s locks and lighting systems can be programmed with several different features. The features you can
program depend on the options that came with your vehicle. The following chart shows the features that can be
programmed. To determine which features your vehicle is equipped with, follow the steps listed for entering the
programming mode.

Feature
Number of Delayed Automatic Last Door Remote Remote Content Content
Chimes Illumination/ Door Locks Closed Driver’s LocWUnlock Theft Theft
Sounded Exit Lighting Locking/ Door Unlock Confirmation Arming/
Lockout Control Disarming
Deterrent
2 X X X - - - -
3 X X X X - - -

4 X X X X X X X

2-62
Entering Programming Mode
To program features, your vehicle must be in the
programming mode. Follow these steps:
1. The content theft-deterrent system must be
disarmed. See Content Theft-Deterrent on
page 2-27.
2. Remove the BCM PRGRM fuse from the instrument
panel fuse block, located to the right of the glove
box. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96.
3. Close the driver’s door
4. Turn the ignition key to ACCESSORY.
5. Count the number of chimes you hear. You will
hear two to four chimes depending onthe features
your vehicle is equipped with. Refer to the chart
shown previously.
You can now program your choices.
To exit the programming mode, follow the steps listed
under Exiting Programming Mode on page 2-71.
Delayed Illumination and
Exit Lighting
This feature allows you to customize the interior lamps
when entering and exiting the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Both Features Off (The interior lamps will
turn on or off at the same instant that a door is opened
or closed.)
Mode 2: Delayed Illumination Only (The interior lamps
will stay on for about 25 seconds after all the doors
and liftgate are closed, or until you lock the doors.)
Mode 3: Exit Lighting Only (The interior lamps will
come on whenever you remove the key from the
ignition and stay on for about 25 seconds, or until
you lock the doors.)
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines
Modes 2 and 3 . )
2-63
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which your
vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for “Entering Programming
Mode” earlier in this section.
2. Turn the interior lamps on by turning the instrument
panel brightness control all the way up.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.
The number of chimes indicates the vehicle’s
current programmed mode. (If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)
4. Turn the interior lamps off to change the
current mode.
5. Turn the interior lamps from on to off until you hear
the number of chimes corresponding to the mode
selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-64
Automatic Door Locks
This feature allows you to customize the automatic
locking and unlocking of the doors when using the
shift lever.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Automatic door locking
and unlocking is disabled. You will always need to
lock your doors manually before driving to increase
occupant safety.)
Mode 2: Automatic Door Locking Only
The automatic door unlock feature is turned off.
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Mode 3: Automatic Unlocking with the Ignition Off
Turn off the ignition with the transaxle in PARK (P);
all doors will unlock automatically.
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Mode 4: Automatic Unlocking with Transaxle in
PARK (P)
Shift into PARK (P) with the ignition on; all doors
will unlock automatically.
Shift out of PARK (P) with the ignition on and the
driver’s door closed; all doors will lock automatically.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed in Mode 3. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
Mode on page 2-63.
2. Press LOCK on the power door lock switch.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.
The number of chimes indicates the vehicle’s
current programmed mode. (If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)
4. Press LOCK to change the current mode.
5. Press LOCK until you hear the number of chimes
corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Last Door Locking and Lockout
Deterrent
This feature allows you to customize the automatic
locking of the doors when exiting the vehicle.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Doors will always lock
immediately when you press LOCK on the power door
lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.)
Mode 2: Lockout Deterrent Only (If you leave your key
in the ignition with the driver’s door open, you won’t
be able to lock the doors with the power door locks.)
Mode 3: Last Door Closed Locking Only (If the power
door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter
is used to lock the vehicle while any door or the
liftgate is open, you will hear three chimes. The doors
will not lock. Five seconds after the last door is
closed, all doors and the liftgate will lock.)
Mode 4: Both Features On (This combines
Modes 2 and 3.)
2-65
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
Mode on page 2-63.
2. Press UNLOCK on the power door lock switch.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.
The number of chimes indicates the vehicle’s
current programmed mode. (If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)
4. Press UNLOCK to change the current mode.
5. Press UNLOCK until you hear the number of chimes
corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-66
Remote Driver Unlock Control
This feature allows you to customize the UNLOCK
button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Remote All Doors Unlock (When you press
UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry transmitter,
all doors and the liftgate will unlock.)
Mode 2: Remote Driver’s Door Unlock Only
(When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless
entry transmitter once, the driver’s door will unlock.
When you press UNLOCK on your remote keyless entry
transmitter again within five seconds, all doors and
the liftgate will unlock.)
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
Mode on page 2-63.
2. Press UNLOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
 3. Count the number of chimes you hear.
The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's
current programmed mode. (If you do not wish to
change the-current mode, you can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this sectionorprogram the next feature
available
vehicle.)
youron
4. Press UNLOCK to change the current mode.
5. Press until You hear the number Of chimes
corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
theprogrammingmode by following the instructions
later in this sectionorprogram the next feature available
hicle.
your on
Remote Lock and Unlock
Confirmation
This feature allows you to customize the feedback
received when locking or unlocking your vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Both Features Off (Remote lock and unlock
confirmation are disabled.)
Mode 2: Exterior Lamps Flash Only
0 When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash to
let you know the command has been received.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional
power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash
to let you know the command has been received.
2-67
Mode 3: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sounds
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, the horn will sound and your
parking lamps will flash to let you know the
command has been received.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional
power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash
to let you know the command has been received.
Mode 4: Exterior Lamps Flash and Horn Sounds
(on second LOCK press)
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to lock your vehicle, your parking lamps will flash
to let you know the command has been received.
The horn will sound and your parking lamps
will flash if you press the LOCK button again
within five seconds.
When you use the remote keyless entry transmitter
to unlock your vehicle or operate your optional
power sliding door(s), your parking lamps will flash
to let you know the command has been received.
2-68
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed in Mode 4. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
Mode on page 2-63.
2. Press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear.
The number of chimes indicates the vehicle’s
current programmed mode. (If you do not wish to
change the current mode, you can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)
4. Press LOCK to change the current mode.
5. Press LOCK until you hear the number of chimes
corresponding to the mode selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
Content Theft-Deterrent System
This feature allows youto turn thecontent theft-deterrent
on and off.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1, Mode 2 and Mode 4: Feature on (If anyone
opens a door or the liftgate while your content
theft-deterrent system is armed, an alarm will sound and
your parking lamps will flash for up to two minutes.)
Mode 3: Feature Off (Your content theft-deterrent
system is always disarmed.)
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory,
it was programmed in Mode 2. The mode to which the
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle
to a different mode, do the following:
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming
Mode on page 2-63.
2. Turn the parking lamps on, then off.
3. Count the number of chimes you hear. The number
of chimes indicates the vehicle’s current
programmed mode. (If you do not wish to change
the current mode, you can either exit the
programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)
4. Turn the parking lamps on, then off to change the
current mode.
5. Turn the parking lamps on, then off until you hear
the number of chimes corresponding to the mode
selection you want.
The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature available
on your vehicle.
2-69
Arming and Disarming the Content
Theft-Deterrent System
To arm or disarm the content theft-deterrent system,
the system must be turned on by using Modes 1, 2 or 4
listed previously.
This feature allows you to customize the arming and
disarming of the content-theft deterrent system.
Programmable Modes
Mode 1: Power Door Lock Switch Arming Off
The system will arm when you lock the doors
with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
The key must be removed from the ignition
when you lock the doors or the content
theft-deterrent system will not arm.
The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Mode 2: Remote Keyless Entry Transmitter
Arm/Disarm Only
0 The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your remote keyless entry transmitter. The key
must be removed from the ignition when you lock
the doors or the content theft-deterrent system
will not arm.
0 The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your remote keyless entry transmitter.
2-70
While this mode provides increased security, it can be
a problem if your remote keyless entry transmitter
is damaged, lost or if it fails to operate for any reason
while the content theft-deterrent system is armed.
The content theft-deterrent system must be disarmed
for the engine to run while in Mode 2; your key can
no longer disarm the system.
If your vehicle is equipped with the Onstar@system,
Onstar@will not be able to remotely unlock your vehicle
if it has been programmed to Mode 2.
Mode 3: Standard Arming and Disarming
0
The system will arm when you lock the doors using
either power door lock switch while any door or the
liftgate is open and the key is removed from the
ignition.
0 The system will arm when you lock the doors with
your key or remote keyless entry transmitter and
the key is removed from the ignition.
0 The system will disarm when you unlock the doors
with your key or remote keyless entry transmitter.
Before your vehicle was shipped from the factory, 5. Press the panic button to change the current mode.
it was programmed in Mode 1. The mode to which the
6. Press the panic button until you hear the number
vehicle was programmed may have been changed since
it left the factory. To determine the mode to which of chimes corresponding to the mode selection
your vehicle is programmed or to program your vehicle you want.
to a different mode, do the following: 7. Remove your key from the door key cylinder.
1. Follow the instructions for Entering Programming The mode you selected is now set. You can either exit
Mode on page 2-63. the programming mode by following the instructions
2. Insert your spare key fully into any door key next in this section or program the next feature available
cylinder and turn it to the unlock position. on your vehicle.
This step is necessary to prevent accidental
programming of this feature to Mode 2. Do not
program this feature to Mode 2 without first
Exiting Programming Mode
reading Mode 2 entirely. The door key cylinder To exit programming mode, turn the key from
must remain in the unlock position during
ACCESSORY to OFF and put the BCM PRGRM fuse
Steps 2 through 4.
back into the instrument panel fuse block.
3. Press the button with the horn symbol on the
remote keyless entry transmitter. After programming a feature, you can exit the
programming mode at anytime. Also, if your vehicle
4. Count the number of chimes you hear. is equipped with the content theft-deterrent system,
The number of chimes indicates the vehicle's remember to arm the svstem before exitinq.
curreni programmed mode. (ii you ao not wish io
change the current mode, you can either exit
the programming mode by following the instructions
later in this section or program the next feature
available on your vehicle.)

2-71
Memory Seat To recall your memory positions, your vehicle
must be in PARK (P). Press and release the memory
button (1 or 2) corresponding to the desired driving
If your vehicle has this
position. The seat will move to the position previously
feature, the controls are
stored for the identified driver. You will hear one beep.
located to the left of
the steering column and You can also store an exit position for each driver.
are used to program The exit position is programmed by moving the seat to
and recall the driver’s the desired exit position and then holding the EXIT
seat settings. button for more than three seconds. The exit position
set will be for the most recently selected driving
position (1 or 2). A double beep will sound when the
memory is set. To use EXIT, your vehicle must be
in PARK (P). Press and release the EXIT button and the
seat will move to the exit position stored for the most
recently selected driver. You will hear one beep.
Adjust the driver’s seat to the position you would like for
driving. Then press and hold memory button 1 for To stop recall movement of the seat at any time,
more than three seconds. A double beep will sound press one of the three memory buttons or one of the
when the memory is set. power seat controls located on the outboard side of the
driver’s seat.
To set the seat for a second driver, follow the previous
steps, but press button 2 instead.

2-72
 Section 3 Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ........................... 3.4
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................ 3.6
Other Warning Devices ............................... 3.6
Horn ............................................................. 3.7
Tilt Wheel ..................................................... 3-7
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever ......................... 3.7
Exterior Lamps ............................................. 3.14
Interior Lamps .............................................. 3.17
Switchbanks ................................................. 3.21
Instrument Panel Switchbank .......................... 3-21
Overhead Console Switchbank ....................... 3.21
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ............3.22
Accessory Power Outlets ............................... 3.24
Climate Controls ............................................ 3.25
Climate Control System ................................. 3.25
Dual Climate Control System .......................... 3.28
Outlet Adjustment ......................................... 3.31
Rear Climate Control System
lZmtnwtq;n-mnt
i l A l M - . n r
\ V U i L l l W U L
I+
Rear Climate Control System
V y ~ L ~ . . .....
C t r c t n m \
, .
L I I L ~ I L U I I i I I I ~ . ........4-49
" "L
(With Entertainment System) ...................... -3-34
Passenger Compartment Air Filter ...................3.37
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators .............3.39
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................ 3.40
Speedometer and Odometer ........................... 3.41
Safety Belt Reminder Light ............................. 3.42
Air Bag Readiness Light ................................ 3-43
Brake System Warning Light .......................... 3-44
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-45
Traction Control System (TCS) WarningLight ......3-46
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-47
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ............................. 3-47
Fuel Gage ................................................... 3-51
Message Center ............................................. 3-52
Service Traction System Warning Message ......3-52
Traction Active Message ................................ 3-53
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Message .................................................. 3-53
Charging System Indicator Message ................3-54
Low Oil Pressure Message ............................ 3-54
Low Engine Oil Level Message ....................... 3-55
Change Engine Oil Message .......................... 3-56
Power Sliding Door Warning Message ............. 3-56
Eee: P,jar !'s:n?!g
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message ..................3-58
v .
!!esss;e .......................... ..Iz-c;7
PASS-Key@I II Security Message ...................-3-58
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message ....... 3-59
Low Fuel Warning Message ........................... 3-59
Driver Information Center (DIC) ....................... 3-60
3-1
 3 Instrument Panel

Audio System(s) ...... ................................ 3.63 Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................ 3-101

Setting the Time ....................................... 3-63 Audio Steering Wheel Controls ...................... 3.102
Radio with CD .......................................... 3-64 DVD Distortion ............................................ 3.103
Radio with Cassette and CD ...................... 3-71 Understanding Radio Reception .................... 3.103
Radiowith Six-Disc CD ......... .... .........3-80
, Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ...............3-103
Entertainment System .................... , .........3-91 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................ 3-104
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................. 3-104
(Without Entertainment System) ...................3-98 Cleaning Your DVD Player ........................... 3.105
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Cleaning the Video Screen ........................... 3.105
(With Entertainment System) ... ............3.100 Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 3.105

3-2
-i /
c
A.Side Outlets L. Horn
B. Front Outlets M. Ignition Switch
C. Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever N. Audio Steering Wheel Controls
D. Hazard Warning Flasher Switch 0. Climate Controls
E. Instrument Panel Cluster P. Rear Fan Controls
F. Center Outlets Q. Cupholder Tray
G. Audio System R. Accessory Power Outlet
H.Side Outlets S. Instrument Panel Switchbank
I . Exterior Lamps Control T. Glove Box
J. HoodRelease U. Front Outlets
K. Audio Steering Wheel Controls V. Instrument Panel Fuse Block

3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers Your hazard warning
flashers button is
located on top of the
steering column.

Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what

Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others. They
also let police know you have a problem. Your front
and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
position your key is in, and even if the key isn’t in.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals won’t work.
Other Warning Devices
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set one up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.

3-6
Horn Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever
You can sound the horn by pressing the horn symbols
on your steering wheel.

Tilt Wheel
A tilt wheel allows you to adjust the steering wheel before
you drive. Youcan raise itto the highest level to give your
legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle.
The lever that allows youto tilt the steering wheel is
located on the left side of the steering column.

To tilt the wheel, hold the

steering wheel and pull
the lever. 1
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
I I--AI--- I 1:-L II -... n--- -I -_I_._.I
I leaulal I ~p I IIYI II L u v v - u c a l I I U Ila1 lyt-I
Flash-to-Pass
Windshield Wipers
0 Windshield Washer
Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position
and release the lever to lock the wheel in place. 0 Cruise Controi

3-7
 Turn and Lane-Change Signals If you have atrailer towing option with added wiring for
the trailer lamps, the signal indicator will flash ata normal
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and two rate even if a turn signal bulb is burned out. Check the
downward (for left) positions. These positions allow you front and rearturn signal lamps regularly to make sure
to signal a turn or a lane change. they are working.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return Turn Signal On Chime
automatically. If either turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound to let the driver know to
1- An arrow on the instrument turn it off.
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the If you needto leave the signal on for more than 3/4 mile
turn or lane change. (1.2 km), turn off the signal andthen turn it back on.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer

To change the headlamps from high to low beam, or
low to high, simply pull the turn signal lever all the way
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever toward you. Then release it.
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you When the high beams
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself are on, this light on the
when you release it. instrument panel cluster
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrow will also be on.
flashes faster than normal, a signal bulb may be
burned out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and check the Your fog lamps will turn off when you switch to
fuse. See Bulb Replacement on page 5-52 and Fuses high beams. Using your high beams in fog is not
and Circuit Breakers on page 5-96. recommended.
3-8
Flash-to-Pass
When the headlamps are off, pull the lever toward you
to momentarily switch on the high beams (to signal
that you are going to pass). When you release the lever,
they will turn off.
Windshield Wipers
To operate the windshield wipers turn the band marked
WIPER, located on the multifunction lever.
MIST: Turn the band to MIST for a single wiping cycle.
Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The
wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want more wipes,
hold the band on mist longer.
OFF: Turn the band to OFF to turn off the
windshield wipers.
LOW: Turn the band to LOW, for steady wiping at
low speed.
HIGH: Turn the band to HIGH, for steady wiping at
high speed.
DELAY: Turn the band away from you to one of the
five sensitivity settings between OFF and LOW, to
choose the delayed wiping cycle. The further the band
is turned toward LOW, the shorter the delay will be.
Use this setting tor light rain or snow.
Remember that damaged wiper blades may prevent you
from seeing well enough to drive safely. To avoid
damage, be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper
blades before using them. If they’re frozen to the
windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If your blades
do become damaged, get new blades or blade inserts.
Heavy snow or ice can overload your wipers. A circuit
breaker will stop them until the motor cools. Clear away
snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Windshield Washer
To wash your windshield, press and hold the windshield
washer paddle. The washers and wipers will operate.
When you release the paddle, the washers will stop, and
the wipers will continue to operate for two cycles, unless
your wipers had already been on. In that case, the wipers
will resume the wi--- r speed you had selected earlier.
I I
In freezing weather, don’t use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-9
Rear Window WasherNViper When the top of the switch is released, the wiper will
continue to cycle three more times. There is only
Your vehicle may have a
one washer fluid reservoir for the front and rear
rear window wiper. If it
windshield wipers. See Windshield Washer Fluid on

i
does, the rear window
page 5-38.
wiper switch is located in
the instrument panel To wash the rear window when the rear wiper is already
switchbank. on, press the top of the switch with the wash symbol
on it. Press in the bottom of the switch to continue the

1
intermittent wiper cycle after the washing cycle is
completed.

Press the wiper symbol on the bottom of the switch to
turn on the intermittent wiper. To turn off the wiper,
gently press the top of the switch.
To wash and wipe the rear window, press the washer
symbol on the top of the switch. Washer fluid will
run down the glass as long as the switch is held in.
Cruise Control
Your vehicle may have cruise control. With cruise
control, you can maintain a speed of about 25 mph
(40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot on
the accelerator. This can really help on long trips.
Cruise control does not work at speeds below about
25 mph (40 km/h).
When you apply your brakes, the cruise control
disengages.

3-10
 Cruise control can be dangerous where
you can’t drive safely at a steady speed.
I ou leave your cruise control on when you’re
So, don’t use your cruise control on
winding roads or in heavy traffic. not using cruise, you might hit a button and go
Cruise control can be dangerous on into cruise when you don’t want to. You could
slippery roads. On such roads, fast be startled and even lose control. Keep the
changes in tire traction can cause cruise control switch off until you want to use
needless wheel spinning, and you could cruise control.
lose control. Don’t use cruise control on
slippery roads.
1. Move the cruise control switch to ON.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the optional
traction control system begins to limit wheel spin, the
cruise control will automatically disengage. See Traction
Control System (TCS) onpage 4-10. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may turn
tne cruise controi back on.

3-11

3. Press the SET button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
3-12
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired speed
and then you apply the brake. This, of course, shuts
off the cruise control. But you don’t need to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch from ON to R/A
(resume/accelerate) briefly.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at R/A, the vehicle will keep
going faster until you release the switch or apply the
brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t hold
the switch at R/A.
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the SET button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed.
 0 Move the cruise switch from ON to R/A. Hold itthere
until you get upto the speed you want,and then
release the switch. (To increase your speed in very
small amounts, movethe switch to R/A briefly and
then release it. Eachtime you do this, your vehicle
will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.)
The accelerate feature will work whether or not you
have set an initial cruise control speed.
Reducing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to reduce speed while using
cruise control:
0 Press the SETbutton at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
0 To slow down in very small amounts, press the
SET button briefly. Eachtime you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the
hills. When going up steep hills, you may have to
step on the accelerator pedal to maintain your speed.
When going downhill, you may have to brake or shift
to a lower gear to keep your speed down. Of course,
applying the brake takes you out of cruise control.
Many drivers find this to be too much trouble and don’t
use cruise control on steep hills.
Ending Cruise Control
There are two ways to turn off the cruise control:
0 Step lightly on the brake pedal, or
- -. ,-
LL- -.-. .:-- -...
:L-L
I I I W V t 11 I t bIUlDG D V V l L b l I
L U
+- nrr
V I I .
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
3-13
Exterior Lamps 0 (Off/Auto): Turning the control to this setting will
activate the automatic headlamp control when it is
dark enough outside and turn off all of the lamps and
lights during the day, except the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL).

?% (Parking Lamps): Turning the control to this

setting turns on the parking lamps together with the
following:
SidemarkerLamps
Taillamps
Instrument Panel Lights

sD (Headlamps): Turning the control to this setting

turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
Lamps on Reminder
If the driver’s door is opened and you turn the ignition
The control to the left of the steering column operates
to OFF or LOCK while leaving the lamps on, you
the exterior lamps.
will hear a warning chime.

3-14
Daytime Running Lamps/Automatic
Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
A light sensor on top of the instrument panel makes
the DRL work, so be sure it isn’t covered. The DRL
system will make your front parking and turn signal
lamps come on in daylight when:
The ignition is on,
the exterior lamps control is off, and
the parking brake is released.
When the DRL are on, only your front parking and turn
signal lamps will be on. Your instrument panel won’t
L e I:+
ue 111
.up.
.-
When it’s dark enough outside, the exterior lamps will
come on automatically. When it’s bright enough outside,
the exterior lamps will turn off and the DRL will turn
on. Of course, you may still turn on the headlamps any
time you need to.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once
you leave the garage, it will take approximately
one minute for the automatic headlamp system to
change to DRL if it is light outside. During that delay,
your instrument panel cluster may not be as bright
as usual. Make sure your instrument panel brightness
control is in the full bright position. See “Instrument
Panel Brightness Control’’ under lnterior Lamps
on page 3-17.
To idle your vehicle with the DRL and automatic
headlamp control off, set the parking brake while the
ignition is in OFF or LOCK. Then start the vehicle.
The DRL and automatic headlamp control will stay off
until you release the parking brake.
As with any vehicle. you should turn on the reuular
headlamp system when you need it.
3-15
Fog Lamps The indicator light will be lit when the fog lamps are on.
Press the top part of the switch to turn them off.
Your vehicle may havefog The indicator light will go off.
lamps. If it does, the fog When your DRL are on, the exterior lamps control must
lamps switch is located in first be turned from the off position before the fog
the instrument panel lamps can be turned on.
switchbank. Press the fog
lamp symbol onthe switch Your parking lamps or headlamps must be on for your
to turn on the lamps. fog lamps to turn on.
At night, when the light sensor automatically turns on
your headlamps, the fog lamps can be turned on when
the exterior lamps control is in any position.
Your fog lamps will go off when you switch to high
beams. Using your high beams in fog is not
recommended.

3-16
Interior Lamps Interior Lamps Override
This switch is located in
Instrument Panel Brightness the overhead console
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument switchbank.
panel lights.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located below the
exterior lamps control.
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the lights
or to the left to dim them.
Interior Lamps Control
Turn the thumbwheel all the way to the right to turn on
the interior lamps, if the interior lamps override switch
is off. Turn the thumbwheel to the left to turn the Pressing the don’t symbol keeps the interior lamps off
lamps off. when any door is opened. Pressing the top of the switch
allows the interior lamps to come on when any door
is opened.

Dome Lamp
The dome lamp is located in the headliner and has two
buttons to manually turn on and off the lamp.The dome
lamp will come on each time you open a door,unless you
turn on the interior lamps override feature. See “Interior
Lamps Override” earlier in this section.

3-1 7
Entry Lighting
With entry lighting, the interior of your vehicle is
illuminated so that you can see inside before you enter
your vehicle. The lamps will come on for 40 seconds
if you unlock your door using your key or the remote
keyless entry transmitter and the ignition is in LOCK or
OFF. After 40 seconds have passed, the interior lamps
will slowly fade out. The lamps will turn off before
the 40 seconds if you:
Lock all the doors using the key,
press LOCK on the power door lock switch, or
press LOCK on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
When any door is opened, entry lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or liftgate
is open, and slowly fade out when all doors and the
liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not been
locked. See “Delayed Lighting’’ following.
To turn the entry lighting feature off or on, see Vehicle
Personalization on page 2-62.
3-18
Delayed Lighting
The delayed lighting feature will continue to illuminate
the interior for 25 seconds after all doors have been
closed so that you can find your ignition and buckle your
safety belt at night. Delayed lighting will not occur
while the ignition is in RUN or ACCESSORY. After
25 seconds have passed, the interior lamps will slowly
fade out. The lamps will fade out before the 25 seconds
have passed if you:
Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
lock all doors using the remote keyless entry
transmitter, or
lock all the doors using the power door lock switch
or the key.
To turn the delayed lighting feature off or on, see
Vehicle Personalization on page2-62.
Exit Lighting Front Reading Lamps
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on for
about 25 seconds whenever you remove the key from
the ignition. If you turn the ignition key to RUN or
ACCESSORY, the lamps will fade out. The lamps will
also fade out if you lock the doors with the power
door lock switch or the remote keyless entry transmitter.
When any door is opened, exit lighting is cancelled.
The interior lamps will stay on while any door or
the liftgate is open, and slowly fade out when all doors
and the liftgate are closed.
The interior lamps may stay on for up to 25 seconds
after all doors have been closed if they have not been
locked. See “Delayed Lighting’’ earlier in this section.
To turn the exit lighting feature off or on, see Vehicle
Personalization on page2-62.
There are two reading lamps in the overhead console.
To turn either reading lamp on or off, press the lens
of the lamp. These lamps will come on each time you
cpe!? E!. deer, C!!?!PSS \/e!-!tcrrn nr! the JnterInr !smps
override feature. See “Interior Lamps Override’’ earlier
in this section.

3-19
Rear Reading Lamps
There may be two reading lamps in the third row
headliner.
To turn on or off either reading lamp, press the lens
of the lamp.
There is also a reading lamp in the second row,
integrated with the dome lamp. To turn on or off
either reading lamp, press the button next to the
lamp lens.
These lamps will not turn on if the interior lamps
override switch is on. See “Interior Lamps Override”
earlier in this section.
Cargo Lamp
The cargo lamp is located in the rear of your vehicle,
above the liftgate opening, and does not have a switch.
The cargo lamp will come on each time you open a
door, unless you turn on the interior lamps override.
See “Interior Lamps Override” earlier in this section.
3-20
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle has a feature to help prevent you from
draining the battery, in case you accidentally leave the
interior lamps on. If you leave any interior lamps on
while the ignition is in LOCK or OFF, they will
automatically turn off after 10 minutes. The lamps won’t
come back on again until you do one of the following:
0 Turn the ignition to RUN or ACCESSORY,
turn the interior lamps thumbwheel all the way to
the right, then slightly back to the left, or
open (or close and reopen) a door that is closed.
If your vehicle has less than 15 miles (25 km) on
the odometer, the battery saver will turn off the lamps
after only three minutes.
Switchbanks
There are two sets of switchbanks located in the front of
the vehicle. The switches will vary with the options
that are on your vehicle.
Instrument Panel Switchbank
This switchbank is located in the instrument panel below
the comfortcontrols. The switchbank may include the
rear fan knob, the rear window wiper/washer, the fog
lamps, thetraction control and the heated seats. If your
vehicle does not have some of these options, there will be
a biank.
For more information, see each of these features in
the Index.
If your vehicle is not equipped with the optional rear
climate control system, there will be a storage space in
this switchbank. The rubber mat can be removed for
cleaning. Snap the mat into place after cleaning.
Overhead Console Switchbank
This switchbank is located in the overhead console.
The switchbank may include the interior lamps override,
the power sliding door(s)/override, the power rear
quarter windows and the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Aid
(URPA) disable switches. If your vehicle does not have
szme e! ?hese q??lzns,there !vi!! !E E? S!mk.
For more information, see each of these features in
the Index.
3-21
Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist
(URPA)
The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system ~~children licj -.%s, or pets arc __ your
is designed to help you park, while the vehicle is in vehicle, RPA won’t tell you they are there.
REVERSE (R). Itoperates only at very low speeds, less You could strike them and they could be
than 3 mph (5 km/h). URPA can helpmake parking injured or killed. Whether or not you are using
easier and to help you avoid colliding with objects such as
URPA, check carefully behind your vehicle and
parked vehicles. The URPA systemcan detect objects
then watch closely whenever you back up.
up to 5 feet (1.5 m) behind the vehicle, and tell you how
close these objects are from your rearbumper.
Your vehicle’s URPA operates when the shift lever is URPA can be turned off by
moved into REVERSE (R) and the vehicle speed is less pressing the rear park aid
than 3 mph (5 km/h). Four ultrasonic sensors located disable switch located
at the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to the in the instrument panel
object. The URPA display is located inside the vehicle, switchbank. When the
near the rear window. It has three color-coded lights system is disabled
used to provide distance and system information to an indicator light will be lit
the driver. on the switch. You will
not see any lights on the
rear display if the switch
is in the off position.

3-22
How the System Works
Unless disabled, the URPA will turn on automatically
when the shift lever is moved into REVERSE (R).
When the system turns on, the three lights on the
display will illuminate for one and a half seconds to let
you know that the system is working. If your vehicle
is moving in REVERSE (R) at a speed greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), the red light will flash to remind
you that the system does not work at speed greater than
3 mph (5 km/h).
If an object is detected at a REVERSE (R) speed of
less than 3 mph (5 km/h), one of the following will occur:
Description English Metric
amber light
- 5 ft. 1.5 m
I I
When the System Does Not Seem to
Work Properly
The light may flash red when the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R) if the ultrasonic sensors are not kept
clean. So be sure to keep your rear bumper free of mud,
dirt, snow, ice and slush. Other conditions that may
affect system performance include things like the
vibrations from a jackhammer or the compression of
air brakes on a very large truck. If after cleaning
the rear bumper and then driving forward at least
15 mph (25 km/h), the display continues to flash red,
see your dealer.
If a trailer was attached to your vehicle, or a bicycle or
an object was on the back of, or hanging out of your
liftgate during your last drive cycle, the light may

ambedamber lights 40 in. 1.0 m also flash red. The light will continue to flash whenever
in REVERSE (R) until your vehicle is driven forward
ambedambedred lights & 20 in. 0.5 m at least 15 mph (25 km/h) without any obstructions
1 continuous chime
ambedambedred lights
flashing & continuous I 0.3 m
behind the vehicle.
For cleaning instructions, see Cleaning the Outside of
L chime I I
. I - I # - # - . r
I U U I vellrdc oli p/ayt.a-rv.

A chime will sound the first time an object is detected

between 20 inches (0.5 m) and 5 feet (1.5 m) away.
URPA cannot detect objects that are above liftgate level.
In order for the rear sensors to recognize an object,
it must be within detection range behind the vehicle.

3-23
Accessory Power Outlets
With accessory power outlets you can plug in electrical
equipment such as a cellular telephone or CB radio.
The front accessory power outlet is located below
the cupholder drawer.
Pull the cover down to use the accessory power outlet.
When not in use, keep the cover on.
The rear accessory power outlet is located in the rear
compartment on the driver’s side next to the air
inflator system.
To remove the cover, pull the tab on the cover and
pull it off. To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at
the back of the cover and put the cover in place.
Push down the tab to secure the cover. When not in
use, always cover the rear accessory power outlet with
the protective cap.
Notice: When using an accessory power outlet,
maximum electrical load must not exceed 20 amps.
Always turn off any electrical equipment when
not in use. Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain your battery.
3-24
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result
in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem see your dealer for additional information
on accessory power outlets.
Notice: Adding some electrical equipment to your
vehicle can damageit or keep other things from
working as they should. This wouldn’tbe covered
by your warranty. Check with your dealer before
adding electrical equipment, and never use anything
that exceeds the amperage rating.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of accessory
or accessory bracket from the plug. Improper use
of the power outletcan cause damage not covered
by your warranty.
Climate Controls To change the current mode, select one of the following:

2 (Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument

Climate Control System panel outlets.

With this system you can control the heating, cooling +2(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
and ventilation for yourvehicle. instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining
air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.

tg (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the

floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rear of the
vehicle. Keep the area under the front seats free of
objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the
vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.

8f?(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or

Operation counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
?-c!rnthe knnh tn OFF tn tL!!-!-! nfF the f3.n. The ?E!!? F L l S t he
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to turned on forthe air conditioning compressor to operate.
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.

3-25
a (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on,
outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle.
When this mode is on, an indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that it is activated.
The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but it
cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
a (Recirculation): Thismode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes
on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent
and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
defog, defrost or outside air modes.
Temperature Control: Turn the center knob clockwise
or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the air
temperature inside your vehicle.
e A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on
to let you know that air conditioning is activated.
3-26
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the
air inside of your vehicle has cooled, turn the
recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
+3(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
(Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically turn off recirculation and
run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezina. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
@ REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
3-27
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
Operation
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
3-28
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
f;’(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
+2(Bi-Level): This mode directs half of the air to the
instrument panel outlets, then directs the remaining
air to the floor outlets. Cooler air is directed to the
upper outlets and warmer air to the floor outlets.
‘/i (Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets. Use this mode to send air to the rearof the
vehicle. Keep thearea under the front seats freeof
objects that could obstruct airflow to the rear of the
vehicle.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. For more information, see “Defogging and
Defrosting” later in this section.
@ (Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to OFF to turn off the fan. The fan must be
turned on for theair conditioning compressor to operate.
a (Outside Air): Press this button to turn the
outside air mode on or off. When this mode is on,
outside air will circulate throughout your vehicle.
When this mode is on, an indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that it is activated.
The outside air mode can be used with all modes,
but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode.
(Recirculation): This mode keeps outside air
from coming in the vehicle. It can be used to prevent
outside air and odors from entering your vehicle or help
heat or cool the air inside your vehicle more quickly.
Press this button to turn the recirculation mode on or off.
When the button is pressed, an indicator light will
come on. The air-conditioning compressor also comes
on. The recirculation mode can be used with vent
and bi-level modes, but it cannot be used with floor,
defog, defrost or outside air modes.
Temperature Control: Use the driver’s and
passenger’s temperature levers to increase or decrease
the air temperature inside your vehicle.
a A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When A/C is
pressed, an indicator light in the button will come on
to let you know that air conditioning is activated.
You may notice a slight change in engine performance
when the air-conditioning compressor shuts off and
turns on again. This is normal. The system is designed
to make adjustments to help with fuel economy while
still maintaining the selected temperature.
On hot days, open the windows to let hot inside air
escape; then close them. This helps to reduce the time
it takes for your vehicle to cool down. It also helps
the system to operate more efficiently.
For quick cool down on hot days, do the following:
1. Select the vent mode.
2. Select the recirculation mode.
3. Select A/C.
4. Select the coolest temperature.
5. Select the highest fan speed.
Using these settings together for long periods of time
may cause the air inside of your vehicle to become
too dry. To prevent this from happening, after the
g r inside cf )mIr \/ehic!e hzs ccs!ed, tllrn the
recirculation mode off.
The air-conditioning system removes moisture from the
air, so you may sometimes notice a small amount of
water dripping underneath your vehicle while idling
or after turning off the engine. This is normal.
3-29
Defogging and Defrosting
There are two modes to clear fog or frost from your
windshield. Use the defog mode to clear the windows
of fog or moisture and warm the passengers. Use
the defrost mode to remove fog or frost from the
windshield more quickly.
Turn the right knob to select the defog or defrost mode.
@ (Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield
and the floor outlets. When you select this mode,
the system turns off recirculation and runs the
air-conditioning compressor unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. The recirculation
mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode.
(Defrost): Pressing this button directs most of the
air to the windshield and the side window outlets, with
some air directed to the floor outlets. In this mode,
the system will automatically turn off recirculation and
run the air-conditioning compressor, unless the outside
temperature is at or below freezing. Recirculation
cannot be selected while in the defrost mode.
3-30
Rear Window Defogger
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
@ REAR: Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off approximately
10 minutes after the button is pressed. If turned on
again, the defogger will only run for approximately
five minutes before turning off. The defogger can also
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the engine.
Notice: Don’t use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage
the warming grid, and the repairs wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty. Do not attach a temporary
vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything similar
to the defogger grid.
Outlet Adjustment Operation Tips
Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the air
inlets on the hood that may block the flow of air
into your vehicle.
Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors may
adversely affect the performance of the system.
Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside your vehicle more
effectively.

Use the knob located in the center of the outlet, to

change the direction of the air flow.

3-31
Rear Climate Control System
(Without Entertainment System) 1 2

Your vehicle may have a rear climate-control system

that allows the driver to adjust the fan speed or a
rear-seat passenger to set a separate temperature
and adjust the fan speed, for the rear-seating area.
This system works with the main climate-control system
in your vehicle.

This knob is located below

the main climate-control
system on the instrument
panel switchbank. Use
this knob to adjust the fan
speed for the rear-seat
passengers, from the
front-seating area.
.--
I fan knob on the switchbank. To return control to
These controls are overhead, on the control panel located
behind the driver’s seat. A rear-seat passenger can use
these controls to personally adjust the temperature and
the fan speed forthe rear-seating area.
The fan knob located on the switchbank must be turned
to R (Rear) to allow the rear-seat passengers to use
the controls located on the control panel in the
rear-seating area. Performing this action disables the
that knob, turn the knob out of R.

3-32
Directing the Airflow
To direct the airflow to the rear-seating area, use the
right knob located on the main climate-control panel.
Select vent or bi-level mode to direct air to the
rear of the vehicle through the overhead outlets.
Select floor, defog or defrost mode to direct air to
the rear of the vehicle through the floor outlets.
Generally the upper outlets are used for air cor ditioning
and the floor outlets are used for heating.
Selecting the Fan Speed
8@ (Fan): Turn the fan knob on either rear far1 control
to numeral 1, 2, or 3 to increase or decrease airflow
to the rear-seating area. Turn the fan knob on either rear
fan control to 0 or OFF to turn off the fan.
Setting the Temperature
If the driver is adjusting the temperature, do the
following:
To increase or decrease the temperature for the entire
vehicle, use the temperature controls located on the
main climate-control panel.
If using the main climate-control panel, then the
air-conditioning system must be on to direct cooled air
to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the
temperature in the rear of the vehicle will remain at
cabin temperature.
If a rear-seat passenger is adjusting the temperature,
do the following:
Turn the right knob, located on the overhead
rear-control panel, behind the driver’s seat, clockwise or
counterclockwise to raise or lower the temperature in
the rear-seating area only.
3-33
Rear Air Outlets Rear Climate Control System
To increase airflow through the rear floor outlets, place (With Entertainment System)
the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward
position. For more information, see “Seats” in the Index. Your vehicle may have a rear climate-control system
that allows the driver to adjust the fan speed or a
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
rear-seat passenger to set a separate temperature
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from obstructions.
and adjust the fan speed, for the rear-seating area.
Also, keep the area around the base of the center
This system works with the main climate-control system
instrument panel console, between and under the front
in your vehicle.
seats, free of objects that could also obstruct airflow
to the rear-seating area. This knob is located below
For more information on how to use the main climate the main climate-control
control system, see “Climate Controls” listed previously system on the instrument
in this section. For information on ventilation, see panel switchbank. Use
“Outlet Adjustment” also listed previously in this section. this knob to adjust the fan
speed for the rear-seat
passengers, from the
front-seating area.

3-34

These controls are overhead, onthe control panel located
behind the front seats.A rear-seat passenger can use
these controls to personally adjustthe temperature and
the fan speed for therear-seating area.
The fan knob located on the switchbank must be turned
to R (Rear) to allow the rear-seat passengers to use
the controls located on the control panel in the
rear-seating area. If this fan knob is not in R when the
FAN or TEMP button is pressed, the rear control
panel will show DISABLED.
Directing the Airflow
To direct the airflow to the rear-seating area, use the
right knob located on the main climate-control panel.
Select vent or bi-level mode to direct air to the
rear of the vehicle through the overhead outlets.
Select floor, defog or defrost mode to direct air to
the rear of the vehicle through the floor outlets.
Generally the upper outlets are used for air conditioning
and the floor outlets are used for heating.
Selecting the Fan Speed
If the driver is adjusting the fan speed, use the
following control:
@ (Fan): Turn the fan knob on the rear fan control
located below the main climate-control system on
the switchbank to numeral 1, 2, or 3 to increase or
decrease airflow to the rear-seating area. Turn the fan
knob on the rear fan control to 0 to turn off the fan.
!? 9 rear-se2.t passenger IC 2dj!E?k?gthe f2n speed,
use the following control:
FAN: Press the FAN button on the rear control panel.
The display will show the current setting. Press the
left and right arrow buttons to cycle through the available
settings: OFF, LOW, MED and HIGH.
3-35
Setting the Temperature
If the driver is adjusting the temperature, do the
following:
To increase or decrease the temperature for the entire
vehicle, use the temperature controls located on the
main climate-control panel.
If using the main climate-control panel, then the
air-conditioning system must be on to direct cooled air
to the rear of the vehicle. If it is not on, then the
temperature in the rear of the vehicle will remain at
cabin temperature.
If a rear-seat passenger is adjusting the temperature,
do the following:
Press the TEMP button on the rear control panel.
Use the left arrow button to make the air cooler.
Use the right arrow button to make the air warmer.
3-36
Rear Air Outlets
To increase airflow through the rear floor outlets, place
the left bucket seat in the second row in the forward
position. For more information, see “Seats” in the Index.
The outlet behind the left rear seat is the cold air
return outlet. Be sure to keep it free from obstructions.
Also, keep the area around the base of the center
instrument panel console, between and under the front
seats, free of objects that could also obstruct airflow
to the rear-seating area.
For more information on how to use the main climate
control system, see “Climate Controls” listed previously
in this section. For information on ventilation, see
“Outlet Adjustment” also listed previously in this section.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
Passenger compartmentair, both outside and
recirculatedair, is routed through a passenger
compartment filter. The filter removes certain
contaminants from the air,including pollen and dust
particles Reductions in airflow, which may occur more
quickly in dusty areas,indicate that the filter needs to be
replaced early. For how often to change the air filter, see
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services on page 6-4.
The access panel for the passenger compartmentair
filter is located in the back of the glove box. To replace
the filter, do the following:

1. Pull the tab located on the outer access panel up

and out.

3-37
 3. The first air filter will pull straight out.To remove the
second, reach in and slide it toward the opening. Pull
the second filter out.
4. Replace the filters by reversing Step 3. Make sure
the filters are inserted so that the sealing foam is
angled in the same direction on both filters. For the
type of filter to use, see Normal Maintenance
Replacement Parts on page 5- 105.
5. Close the inner access door, while squeezing the
tab. Be sure it is tightly closed.
6. Snap the outer access panel into the back of the
glove box.

2. Then push the tab, located on the left of the inner

access panel, to the right.

3-38
Warning Lights, Gages and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages that
may be on your vehicle. The pictures will help you
locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to your warning lights and gages could also save you or
others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they’re working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when
this happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there’s a problem with your vehicle.
When one ofthe warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when oneof the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can becostly - and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They’re a big help.
Your vehicle also has a message center that works
along with the warning lights and gages. See Message
Center on page 3-52.
3-39
Instrument Panel Cluster
Your instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how
fast you’re going, how much fuel you’re using, and many other things you’ll need to drive safely and economically.
The indicator warning lights and gages are explained on the following pages.

United States version shown, Canada similar

3-40
Speedometer and Odometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer.
You may wonder what happens if your vehicle needs a
new odometer installed. If the new one can be set to
the mileage total of the old odometer, then that will
be done. If it can’t, then it’s set at zero and a label must
be put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage
reading when the new odometer was installed.
Dual Trip Odometers
In addition to the standard odometer, the cluster can
also display two separate trip odometers (designated
by the letter A or B in the display window) as well as
your vehicle’s Engine Oil Life (designated by the
word OIL in the display window). The display can be
toggled between the odometer, the trip odometers
and engine oil life by quickly pressing and releasing
the tripheset button located to the right of the
temperature gage. The display toggles once each
time the tripheset button is pressed for less than
1.5 seconds. The display toggles in the following
s i ? q w n ~ eQ!km&r
: - Trip Q d n m ~ t.A. ~ r- Trip n&m@er
B - Engine Oil Life. If the engine oil life is left on the
display, it will automatically toggle back to the odometer
after approximately 15 seconds. Each of the two trip
odometers can be used to keep track of different
trip distances (for example, the mileage of a long trip
and the mileage diiileii oi-i the cui-i-ei-it tank of fuel).
3-41
The trip odometers will continue to keep track of
miles (kilometers) driven even if they are not currently
displayed. To reset the odometer to zero (0), press
and hold the tripheset button for at least 1.5 seconds,
but less than three seconds. Only the trip odometer that
is showing in the display will be reset.
Retro-Active Reset
Each of the two trip odometers has a feature callea
retro-active reset. This feature can be used to set
either (or both) trip odometer(s) to the number of miles
(kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned
on. This can be used if you forget to reset your
trip odometer at the beginning of a trip. To use the
retro-active reset feature, press and hold the tripheset
button for at least three seconds. The trip odometer
will then display the number of miles (kilometers) driven
since the ignition was last turned on and you began
driving. (If you use the retro-active reset feature
after you have started the vehicle, but before you begin
moving, the display will show the number of miles
(kilometers) you drove during the last ignition cycle.)
3-42
Once you begin driving, the trip odometer will
accumulate mileage. For example, if you have driven
5.0 miles (8.0 km) since you started your vehicle,
and then activate the retro-active reset feature, the
display will show 5.0 miles (8.0 km). As you drive,
the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km),
5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. Only the trip odometer that is
displayed will be affected by the retro-active reset
so that both trip odometers can be used separately.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
come on for several seconds to remind people to
fasten their safety belts.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds.
If the driver’s belt is
already buckled, neither
the chime nor the light
will come on.
Air Bag Readiness Light
There is an air bag readiness light on the instrument
panel, which shows the airbag symbol. The system
checks the air bag’s electrical system for malfunctions. .eaG...ess light ,.ays on after y--
If the air bag
The light tells you if there is an electrical problem. start your vehicle,it means the air bag system
The system check includes the air bag sensor, the air may not be working properly. The air bagsin
bag modules, the wiring and the diagnostic module. your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
For more information on the air bag system, see Air Bag could even inflate without a crash. To help avoid
Systems on page 1-69. injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle
serviced right away if the air bag readiness light
This light will come on stays on after you start your vehicle.
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. Then The air bag readiness light should flash for a few
the light should go out. seconds when you turn the ignition key to RUN. If the
This means the system light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
is ready. be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

If the air bag readiness light stays on after you start the
.,nL;-lm nr n-mrrn n m ..rhn- ,,-ma q v n Av;~r;mrn \ , A ~ * V qir
V G I I I b I G VI bW111Ga VI1 Y Y I I G I I YWU UI’V U i I V i I I y ’ Y W U t U B I

bag system may not work properly. Have your vehicle

serviced right away.

3-43
Brake System Warning Light
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on when you set your parking
brake. The light will stay on if your parking brake
BRAKE
doesn’t release fully. If it stays on after your parking
brake is fully released, it means you have a brake
problem.
United States Canada
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided
into two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other This light should come on briefly when you turn
part can still work and stop you. For good braking, the ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then,
though, you need both parts working well. have it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if
If the warning light comes on, there could be a there’s a problem.
brake problem. Have your brake system inspected If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off
right away. the road and stop carefully. You may notice that the
pedal is harder to push. Or, the pedal may go
closer to the floor. It may take longer to stop.

3-44
If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. Anti-Lock Brake System
See Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light on
F e 3-45 and Towing \’ rr Vehicle on page 4-32. Warning Light

r Your vehicle may have

this light. If it does, the
anti-lock brake system
warning light should come
Your brake system may not be working on for a few seconds
properly if the brake system warning light is when you turn the ignition
on. Driving with the brake system warning light key to RUN.
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you’ve pulled off the road and stopped
If the anti-lock brake system warning light stays on
carefully, have the vehicle towed for service. longer than normal after you’ve started your engine, turn
the ignition off. Or, if the light comes on and stays on
when you’re driving, stop as soon as possible and turn
the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset
the system. If the light still stays on, or comes on again
while you’re driving, the anti-lock brake system needs
service and you don’t have anti-lock brakes.
-I - I . I - . I I^ .-,.- -..-I _ _ . ^ _:--.
__ l:-.LL -L-..l-l -^-_
I I le d l Ill-IWGK U l d K t : byblW i I v v a l I 111 ly llYl11 31l w u i u b W l I I C

on briefly when you turn the ignition key to RUN.

If the light doesn’t come on then, have it fixed so it will
be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

3-45
Traction Control System (TCS) If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
Warning Light system will turn off and the warning light will come
on. If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction
control system will turn off and the warning light will
come on until your brakes cool down.
TRAC If the traction control system is affected by an
OFF engine-related problem, the system will turn off and
the warning light will come on.
If the traction control system warning light comes on
United States Canada and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
Your vehicle may have a traction control system
warning light. The traction control system warning light
may come on for the following reasons:
If you turn the system off by pressing the TCS
button located in the instrument panel switchbank
the warning light will come on and stay on. To
turn the system back on, press the button again.
The warning light should go off. See Traction
Control System (TCS) on page 4-10 for more
information.

3-46
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Service Engine Soon Light in the
United States or Check Engine Light
in Canada

/I-[\
u SOON
United States Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. If the
gage pointer moves into the red area, your engine is
too hot!
It means that your engine coolant has overheated.
If you have been operating your vehicle under normal
drivinq conditions, vou should pull off the road, stop your
vehicle and turn off the engine as soon as possible.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-26.
SERVICE
ENGINE
United States Canada
Your vehicle is equipped with a computer which
monitors operation of the fuel, ignition and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board Diagnostics-
Second Generation) and is intended to assure that
emissions are at accepiabie ieveis ior ine iiie of i h e
vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner environment.

3-47
The SERVICE ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light
comes on to indicate that there is a problem and
service is required. Malfunctions often will be indicated
by the system before any problem is apparent. This
may prevent more serious damage to your vehicle.
This system is also designed to assist your service
technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, your emission controls
may not work aswell, your fuel economy may not
be as good and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that
may not be covered by your warranty.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transaxle, exhaust, intake or fuel system of your
vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with
other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light doesn’t come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
Light Flashing - A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Dealer or qualified service center
diagnosis and service may be required.
Light On Steady - An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Dealer or qualified service center diagnosis
and service may be required.

3-48
If the Light Is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
Reducingvehiclespeed.
Avoidinghardaccelerations.
Avoiding steep uphill grades.
If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and drive the vehicle to
your dealer or qualified service center for service.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Are you low on fuel?
As your engine starts to run out of fuel, your engine
may not run as efficiently as designed since small
amounts of air are sucked into the fuel line causing
misfire. The system can detect this. Adding fuel should
correct this condition. Make sure to install the fuel
cap properly. See Filling Your Tank on page 5-7.
It will take a few driving trips to turn the light off.
3-49
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality
will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as
designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
have your dealer or qualified service center check
the vehicle. Your dealer has the proper test equipment
and diagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electrical
problems that may have developed.
3-50
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the SERVICE
ENGINE SOON or CHECK ENGINE light is on or not
working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, see your dealer or qualified service
center to prepare the vehicle for inspection.
Fuel Gage If your fuel is low, the warning message in the message
center will come on. See Low Fuel Warning Message
on page 3-49.
Your fuel gage tells you about how much fuel you have
left when the ignition is on.
Here are four things that some owners ask about.
All these things are normal and do not indicate that

uw MESSAGE CENTER

United States
FUEL
MESSAGE CENTER

Canada
anything is wrong with the fuel gage.

0
When the indicator nears empty, you still have a little
fuel left, but you should get more soon.
0 The gage may not indicate empty when the ignition
At the gas station, the gas pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
It takes a little more (or less) fuel to fill up than the
gage reads. For example, the gage reads half full,
but it took more (or less) than half of the tank’s
capacity to fill it.
The gage pointer may move while cornering,
braking or speeding up.
is turned off.

3-5 1
Message Center When this message is displayed, the traction control
system will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving
The message center is located in the instrument accordingly.
panel cluster. It gives you important safety and The message may appear for the following reasons:
maintenance facts.
If there’s a brake system problem that is specifically
related to traction control, the traction control
Service Traction System Warning system will turn off and the warning message will
Message come on.
e If your brakes begin to overheat, the traction control
system will turn off and the warning message will
SERVICE come on until your brakes cool down.
TRACTION If the traction control system is affected by an
engine-related problem, the system will turn off
SYSTEM and the warning message will come on.
I I If the traction control system warning message comes
United States Canada on and stays on for an extended period of time when the
system is turned on, your vehicle needs service.
If your vehicle has thetraction control system andthis
message is displayed when you’re driving, there may be
a problem with your traction control system. Your vehicle
may need service.

3-52
 Traction Active Message Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Message
I 1 I

TRACTION HOT
ACTIVE COOLANT
TEMP
States United Canada
States United Canada
If your vehicle has the traction control system, the
TRACTION ACTIVE message will appear when the
This message will come on when your engine gets
traction control system is limiting wheel spin. You may
too hot.
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If this message comes on, it means that your engine
Slippery road conditions may exist if this message coolant has overheated. If you have been operating your
appears, so adjust your driving accordingly. vehicle under normal driving conditions, you should
The message will stay on for a few seconds after pull off the road, stop your vehicle and turn off the
the traction control system stops limiting wheel spin. engine as soon as possible.
See En-qine Overheatinq on page 5-26.

3-53
Charging System Indicator Message Low Oil Pressure Message
The charging system
battery symbol will come LOW
on in the message
center when you turn on OIL
the ignition as a check PRESSURE
to show you it is working.
LL
Canada States United
It will remain on as long as the engine is not running.
Your vehicle is equipped with a low oil pressure warning
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays on,
message.
or comes on while you are driving, you may have a
problem with the charging system. It could indicate that Your oil pressure message lets you know when you
you have problems with a generator drive belt, may have a problem with your engine oil pressure.
or another electrical problem. Have it checked right When the engine is running and this message appears,
away. Driving while this indicator appears in the the engine oil level may be too low. There may also
message center could drain your battery. be another problem causing low oil pressure.
If you must drive a short distance with the message on,
be certain to turn off all your accessories, such as
the radio and air conditioner.

3-54
 Low Engine Oil Level Message
I I I

L,n’t keep driving i, .he oil pressure ,i ,ow. LOW

If you do, your engine can become so hot that ENG OIL
it catches fire. You or others could be burned. LEVEL
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced. I I I
States United Canada

Notice: Damage to your engine from neglected oil If this message comes on, it means your engine is
problems can be costly and is not covered by low on oil.
your warranty. You need to check the oil level right away. Have your
vehicle serviced immediately.

3-55
Change Engine Oil Message Power Sliding Door Warning
I I I Message
CHANGE

L:”
ENGINE
OIL c DOOR
AJAR
United States Canada I I I

United States Canada

If this message comes on and stays on after you started
the engine, have the oil changed.
For additional information on when to change the oil
and resetting the system, see Engine Oil on page 5-14.
This message will come on if the power sliding door is
not completely closed and the ignition is turned to
RUN or START.

3-56
If you shift the transaxle out of PARK (P) while the Door Ajar Warning Message
power sliding door is open or in the process of closing,
and the power sliding door is turned off, a buzzer
will sound. This is a warning that the power sliding door
is not completelv closed.
DOOR
AJAR

shift the transaxle out of PARK (Pi nd United States Canada

accelerate before the power sliding door
latches closed, the door may reverse to the
open position. A child or others could fall out
of the vehicle and be injured. Always make
sure the power sliding door is closed and
latched before you driveaway.
This message will come on when the ignition is turned
to RUN or START and the driver’s or passenger’s
door is open.
It may also come on if a sliding door is not in the fully
latched position.

3-57
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message PASS-Key@111 Security Message

Ga
77
REAR
HATCH SECURITY
AJAR
I I I I I I I

United States Canada

Canada States United

This message will come on when the ignition is turned
to RUN or START and the rear hatch is open.
If you are ever driving and this message comes on
and stays on, you will be able to restart your engine if
you turn it off.
Your PASS-Key@Ill system, however, is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by the PASS-Key@Ill system
at this time. See PASS-Key@111 on page 2-29 for more
information.

3-58
 All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Low Fuel Warning Message
Message

AWD
DISABLE I

I I I I
United States Canada
States United Canada
If your fuel is low, the warning message will come on
and stay on until you add fuel.
Your vehicle may have this message. itIfdoes, it will
come on whenthere is a spare tire on the vehicle, or If the warning message is still on after adding fuel,
when theanti-lock brake systemwarning light comes on, you need to reset the warning message. To reset the
or whenthe rear differential fluid is overheating. This warning message, turn the ignition off and then back on.
message will goout when the differential fluid cools. If the message stays on, see your dealer.
The all-wheel-drive system will be disabled until the
compact spare tire is replaced by a full-size tire.
If the warning message is still on after putting on the
tull-slze tire, you need to reset the warning message.
To reset the warning message, turn the ignition off
and then back on again. If the message stays on,
see your dealer right away. See All-Wheel Drive
(A WD)System on page 4-1 I for more information.

3-59
Driver Information Center (DIC)
Your vehicle may have aDIC. If it does, the DIC will show
information about the vehicle and the surroundings.
3-60
E/M (English/Metric Button): You can change the
display to a metric or English reading at any time
by pressing E/M.
MODE: Press this button to cycle through three modes
of operation - off, compass/temperature and trip
computer mode.
Off: No driver information is displayed in this mode
of operation.
Compass/Temperature Mode: One of eight compass
readings and the outside temperature are displayed.
If the temperature is below 38°F (3"C), the temperature
reading will toggle between displaying the outside
temperature and the word ICE for two minutes.
Trip Computer Mode: In the trip computer mode,
pressing the MODE button cycles through the five
displays. Press the MODE button after the last trip
computer display to return the DIC to the OFF mode.
See "Trip Computer" later in this section for more
information.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between magnetic
north and geographic north. In some areas of the
country, the difference is great enough to cause the
compass to give false readings. If this occurs, the
compass variance must be set.
Setting the Variance
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the compass/
temperature mode. Press both the E/M and MODE
buttons simultaneously for approximately five seconds.
The last entered variance zone number willbe displayed.
Press the E/M button until the proper variance number,
as shown onthe map, is showing. Pressthe MODE
button to set the new variance zone and resume normal
operation.
The display will show all the display segments briefly to
acknowledge the change in the zone number.
Automatic Compass Calibration
The compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to manually set the compass. When the vehicle
is new, the calibration process may not be complete.
In these cases the calibration symbol C will be displayed
where the compass reading is normally displayed.
To calibrate the compass, in an area free from large
metal objects, make three 360" turns. The calibration
symbol will turn off and the compass reading will
be displayed.

t \ (
'7

3-61
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the calibration
symbol does not appear, you must manually put the
compass into the calibration mode.
Turn the ignition on and cycle the DIC to the
compass/temperature mode. Press both the E/M and
MODE buttons simultaneously for at least 10 seconds
until the calibration symbol appears. Release both
buttons and complete three 360" turns in an area free
from large metal objects. The calibration symbol will
turn off and the compass reading will be displayed.
Error Displays
0 An error of the vehicle's speed sensor or fuel
sender will cause -E- to be displayed.
0 In the absence of vehicle communications, a dash
"--" is displayed.
If one of these error messages appear, see your dealer.
3-62
Trip Computer
There are five trip computer displays available by
pushing the MODE button. The information will appear
in the following order:
AVG ECON (Average Fuel Economy): This shows the
average fuel economy since the last reset.
INST ECON (Instant Fuel Economy): This shows fuel
economy for the most recent second of driving.
RANGE (Trip Range): This shows the estimated
distance that can be traveled with the remaining fuel.
The fuel economy used to calculate range is based
on the last few hours of driving.
FUEL USED (Trip Fuel Used): This shows the
accumulated fuel used since the last reset.
AVG SPEED (Average Speed): This shows the
average speed since the last reset.
Resetting the Trip Computer
Press and hold the MODE and E/M buttons for at least
two seconds. The reset is acknowledged with the
display showing all segments briefly. A reset can only
be done in AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED
displays. AVG ECON, FUEL USED and AVG SPEED
can only be reset independently. Only the mode
that is displayed will be reset.
Audio System(s) Setting the Time
Notice: Before you add any sound equipment to Your radio may have a button marked with an H or
your vehicle - like a tape player, CB radio, mobile HR to represent hours and an M or MIN to represent
minutes.
telephone or two-way radio- be sure you can
add what you want. If you can, it’s very important Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
to do it properly. Added sound equipment may appears on the display. AM will also appear for morning
interfere with the operation of your vehicle’s engine, hours. Press and hold the minute button until the
Delphi Electronics radio or other systems, and correct minute appears on the display. The time may be
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may set with the ignition on or off.
interfere with the operation of sound equipment that To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
has been added improperly. Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
So, before adding sound equipment, check with
UPDATED appears on the display. If the time is not
your dealer and be sureto check federal rules
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on the
covering mobile radio and telephone units. display instead.
Your audio systemhas been designed to operate easily
and to give years of listening pleasure. You will get the
most enjoyment outof it if you acquaint yourself with it
first. Find out what your audio system can do and how to
npfygte all nf its cnntrnls tn he SL1t-e y n ~ t r ep t i n g the
most outof the advancedengineering that wentinto it.
Your vehicle has a featurecalled Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, you can play your audio
system even after the ignition is turned off. See
“Retained Accessory Power (RAP)” under !,nr?it.ior!
Positions on page 2-32.

3-63
Radio with CD AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want
to use automatic volume, select OFF.
DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
Playing the Radio between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off. To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
decrease volume. and selected display will now be the default.

3-64
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1,
or FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4 SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4 PSCAN (Preset Scan) b’ : Press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds and the radio
will produce one beep. The radio will scan to the
first preset station stored on the pushbuttons, play for a
few seconds and flash the station frequency, then go
on to the next preset station. SCAN will be displayed.
Press one of the arrows again or one of the pushbuttons
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to the
preset stations that are in
the selectedband and onlyto those witha strong signal.
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
favorite stations. You can set up to 18stations (six AM,
six FMl and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMl or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you
are listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return and the bass
and treble equalization that you selected will also
be automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
3-65
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the
bass or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy,
you may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust the bass and the treble to the middle position,
push and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. You will hear one
beep and the radio will display ALL. The bass and the
treble will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock and classical
stations.
To return the bass and treble to the manual mode, push
and release the AUDIO knob until MANUAL is displayed.
3-66
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade, push and release the AUDIO knob
until FADE appearson the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and thefade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob, then push it again and hold it until
you hear one beep. Thebalance and the fade will be
adjusted to the middle position and the display will show
the speaker balance.
To adjust alltone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone or
speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce one
beep and display ALL with thelevel display in the middle
position.
Using RDS
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
0 seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
or thecall letters will appearon the display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations mayalso provide the time of
day, a program type (PTY) for current programming and
the nameof the program being broadcast.
DlSP (Display): For RDS, press this knob to change
what appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY ana tne name of the program (if avaiiabiej.
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to take you to the category’s
first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPEbutton twice to
display the category and then to goto another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type,
NONE will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
E!!!W!S the r2dic tc S\!!!fCh !c 2 s!rcr?r;er S!S?iE ?it!? fhP
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stronger
stations. Press and hold BAND again for two seconds
to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will appear
on the displaji. The radio wi/i riot switch to other stations.
3-67
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on
the display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist and song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it will
appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
the display with each press. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The old message can be displayed
by pressing the INFO button until a new message is
received or a different station is tuned to.
When a message is not available from a station,
NO INFO will be displayed.
3-68
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a traffic announcement comes on the current
station or on arelated network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compact disc is playing.
The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the display
while the announcement plays. If the compact disc player
was being used, play will stop during the announcement.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. TRAF will appear on
the display. When a traffic announcement comes on the
station that was found, you will hear it. When the
traffic announcement is over, the radio will resume play
of the CD. If no station is found, NO TRAF will appear
on the display.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@ system haslocked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the disc should begin
playing. The display will show the CD symbol. If you
want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first
press DlSP or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
previous trackif the currenttrack has been playing for
less than eight seconds.If pressed when thecurrent
track has been playing for more than eight seconds,
it will go to the beginningof the current track. TRACK
ana the track number wiii appear on the aispiay.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the disc.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the track.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at six
times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the track.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press RDM again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
3-69
4 SEEK b : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or of the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either of the
arrows is held or pressed more than once, the player
will continue moving backward or forward through
the CD.
DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The CD will stop but remain in the player.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio.
Compact Disc Messages
If the disc comes out or CHECK CD appears on the
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.

EJT (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Eject

may be activated with either the ignition or radio off.
CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if this
button is pressed first.

3-70
Radio with tte and CD AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, your audio system adjusts automatically
to make up for road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM or HIGH. AVOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will allow for more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. Then as
you drive, automatic volume increases the volume as
necessary to overcome noise at any speed. The volume
level should always sound the same to you as you
drive. NONE will appear on the display if the radio
cannot determine the vehicle speed. If you don’t want
to use automatic volume, select OFF.
DlSP (Display): Push this knob to switch the display
Playing the Radio between radio station frequency and time. Time display
is available with the ignition turned off.
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off. To change the default on the display, push the knob
until you see the display you want, then hold the knob
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep
decrease volume. and selected display will now be the default.

3-7 1
Finding a Station
BAND: Press this button to switch between AM, FM,
or FM2. The display will show your selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to choose radio stations.
4 SEEK b : Press the right or the left arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station and stay there.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.
4 PSCAN (Preset Scan) b : Press and hold one of
the arrows for more than two seconds. The radio will
produce one beep. The radio will scan through each of
the preset stations stored on the pushbuttons, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset station.
SCAN will be displayed. Press one of the arrows
again or one of the pushbuttons to stop scanning
presets.
The radio will scanonly to thepreset stations that are in
the selected band andonly to those with a strong signal.
3-72
Setting Preset Stations
The six numbered pushbuttons let you returnto your
favorite stations. You can set upto 18 stations (sixAM,
six FM1 andsix FM2) by performingthe following steps:
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select AM, FMI or FM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press AUTO TONE to choose the bass and treble
equalization that best suits the type of station you
are listening to.
5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons. The radio will produce one beep.
Whenever you press that numbered pushbutton,
the station you set will return and the bass
and treble equalization that you selected will also
be automatically selected for that pushbutton.
6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
Setting the Tone (Bassnreble)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or the treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, you
may want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass and treble to the middle position, push
and hold the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce
one beep and adjust the display level to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
AUTO TONE (Automatic Tone): Press this button to
choose bass and treble equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz,talk, pop, rock and classical
stations.
To return the bass and
treble to the manual mode, push
and releasethe AUDIO knob until MANUAL is displayed.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and fade to the middle position,
push the AUDIO knob then push it again and hold it until
you hear one beep. The balance and the fade will be
adjusted to the middle position and the display will show
the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and display ALL with the level display in
the middle position.
3-73
Using RDS
Radio Data System (RDS): Your audio system is
equipped with a Radio Data System (RDS). RDS
features are available for use only on FM stations that
broadcast RDS information.
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
display messages from radio stations, and
seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station name
or the callletters will appear on the display instead of the
frequency. RDS stations may also provide the time of
day, a programtype (PTY) for current programming and
the name of the program being broadcast.
DlSP (Display): For RDS, press this knob to change
what appears on the display while using RDS. The
display options are station name, RDS station frequency,
PTY and the name of the program (if available).
3-74
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE LIST knob. TYPE and a PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE LIST knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button to take you to the category’s
first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press the
SEEK TYPE button once. If the category is not
displayed, press the SEEK TYPE button twice to
display the category and then togo to another
station.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type,
NONE will appear on the display and the radio will
return to the last station you were listening to.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. Press and hold BAND for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold BAND again for
two seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF
will appear on the display. The radio will not switch to
other stations.
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! willappear on the display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a cassette tape or compact disc is playing. If the
cassette tape or compact disc player is playing, play will
stop during the announcement. You will not be able
to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on
the display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist and song title,
call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole messageis not displayed,parts of it will
appear everythree seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new groupof words will appear on the
display with each press. Once the complete message has
been displayed,the information symbol will disappear
from the displayuntil another new message is received.
The old messagecan be displayed by pressing the INFO
button until a new messageis received or a different
station is tuned to.
When a messageis not available from a station,
NO INFO willbe displayed.
TRAF (Traffic): Press this button to receive traffic
announcements. If the current tuned station does not
broadcast traffic announcements, the radio will seek to a
station that does. When the radio finds a station that
broadcasts traffic announcements, it will stop. TRAF will
appear on the display and when a traffic announcement
comes on you will hear it. If no station is found, NO
TRAF will appear on the display.
When a trafficannouncement comes on the current
station or on a related network station, you will hear it,
even if the volume is muted or a compactdisc is playing.
The traffic symbol and TRAF will appear on the display
while the announcement plays. If the compact disc player
was being used, play will stop during the announcement.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt
the play of a cassette, or CD. Press the TRAF button.
The radio will seek to astation that broadcasts traffic
announcements. Whenthe radio finds a station that
L..---A---+-
VI waubaala
+.--LC:-
uaillb
----. .------
a1 I I IWUI
+^ :I ...:I1 atup. TD
I ~ GI IIG I 113, 11 v v i l l
-LA- A r ...:I1
I AI VVIII
appear on the display. When a trafficannouncement
comes on the station that was found,you will hear it.
When the traffic announcement is over, the radio will
resume play of the cassette, or CD. If no station is found,
NO TRAF will appear on the display.
3-75
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): This message is
displayed when the radio has not been calibrated
properly for the vehicle. You must return to the
dealership for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK@system has locked up. You must
return to the dealership for service.
Playing a Cassette Tape
Your tape player is built to work best with tapes that
are up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well
in this player. The longer side with the tape visible
should face to the right. If the ignition is on, but the radio
is off, the tape can be inserted and will begin playing.
A tape symbol is shown on the display whenever a tape
is inserted. If you hear nothing but a garbled sound,
the tape may not be in squarely. Press EJT to remove
the tape and start over.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The display
will show TAPE and an arrow showing which side of
the tape is playing.
If you want to insert a tape while the ignition is off,
first press EJT or DISP.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-76
1 PREV (Previous): Your tape must have at least three
seconds of silence between each selection for previous
to work. Press this pushbutton to go to the previous
selection on the tape if the current selection has been
playing for less than three seconds. If pressed when the
current selection has been playing from 3 to 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the previous selection or
the beginning of the current selection, depending upon
the position on the tape. If pressed when the current
selection has been playing for more than 13 seconds,
it will go to the beginning of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times or holding it
will increase the number of selections to be searched
back, up to -9.
2 NEXT: Your tape must have at least three secondsof
silence between each selection for next to work. Press
this pushbutton to go to the next selection
on the tape.
If you pressthe pushbutton more than once, the player
will continue moving forward through the tape. SEEK and
a positive number will appear onthe display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to reverse the
tape rapidly. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The radio will play while the tape reverses. The station
frequency and REV will appearon the display. You may
select stations during reverse operation using TUNE,
SEEK or PSCAN.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to advance
quickly. Press this pushbutton again to return to playing
speed. The radio will play while the tape advances.
The station frequency and FWD will appear on
the display. You may select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE, SEEK or PSCAN.
5 0 SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
4 SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If the arrows are held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or a negative number will appear on the display.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a tape is playing. The tape will stop but remain in
the player.
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a tape when
listening to the radio. PressTAPE CD to switch between
the tapeand compact discif both are loaded. The inactive
tape or GU will remain safelyinside the radio for future
listening.
A EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the right
of the cassette tape slot, to eject a tape. Eject may
be activated with the radio off. Cassette tapes may be
ioacieci with the radio off if this button is pressea first.
Cassette Tape Messages
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the radio display, the tape won’t play because of one
of the following errors.
@ The tape is tight and the player can’t turn the tape
hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with the
open end down and try to turn the right hub
counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape over
and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily, your
tape may be damaged and should not be used in
the player. Try a new tape to make sure your player
is working properly.
The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of Your Cassette Tape Player on page 3-103.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-77
CD Adapter Kits
It is possible to use a portable CD player adapter kit
with your cassette tape player after disabling the
tight/loose tape sensing feature on your tape player.
To disable the feature, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button. The radio will
display READY and flash the cassette symbol.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
The override feature will remain active until EJT is
pressed.
Playing a Compact Disc
Insert a disc partway into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the disc should begin
playing. The display will show the CD symbol. If you
want to insert a compact disc with the ignition off, first
press DlSP or EJT.
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
3-78
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbuttonto go to the
previous track if the current track has been
playing for
less than eight seconds. If pressed when the current track
has beenplaying for more than eight seconds, it will go to
the beginning of the current track. TRACK and the track
number will appear on thedisplay. If you hold this
pushbutton or press it more than once, the player will
continue moving back through the disc.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbuttonto go to the next track.
TRACK. Thetrack number will appear on the display.
If you hold this pushbutton or press it more than once,
the player will continue moving forward through the disc.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
reverse quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
advance quickly within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show ET and the elapsed time.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press it again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
4 SEEK b : The right arrow is the same as the NEXT
pushbutton, andthe left arrow is thesame as the PREV
pushbutton. If either of the SEEKarrows is heldor
pressed morethan once, the player will continue moving
backward orforward through the CD.
DlSP (Display): Press this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed time
will appear on the display. To change the default on
the display (track or elapsed time), push the knob until
you see the display you want, then hold the knob
for two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a disc is plavina. The disc will stor, but remain in
the player.
e
TAPE CD: Press this button to play a CD when listening
to the radio. Press TAPE CD to switch between the tape
and compact disc if both are loaded. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
A EJT (Eject): Press this button, located to the right
of the CD slot, to eject a CD. Eject may beactivated with
either the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loadedwith
the radio and ignition off if this button is pressedfirst.
Compact Disc Messages
If the disc comes out or CHECK CD appears on the
display, it could be for one of the following reasons:
0 You’re driving on a very rough road. When the road
becomes smoother, the disc should play.
0 It’s very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the disc should play.
0 The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down.
0 It is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be
corrected, contact your dealer.
3-79
Radio with Six-Disc CD AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): Your system has a
feature called automatic volume. With this feature,
your audio system adjusts automatically to make up for
road and wind noise as you drive.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED or MAX. Each higher setting will
allow for more volume compensation at faster vehicle
speeds. Then, as you drive, automatic volume increases
the volume, as necessary, to overcome noise at any
speed. The volume level should always sound the same
to you as you drive. If you don’t want to use automatic
volume, select OFF.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to switch the display
between the time and the radio station frequency.
Playing the Radio Push this knob with the ignition off to display the time.

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system To change the default on the display, push the knobuntil
on and off. you see the display you want, then hold the knob for
two seconds. The radio will produce one beep and
VOL (Volume): Turn the knob to increase or to selected display will now be the default.
decrease volume.

3-80
Finding a Station Setting Preset Stations
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
and FM2. The display will show your selection. favorite stations. You can set upto 18 stations (six AM,
six FMI and six FM2) by performing the following steps:
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
1. Turn the radio on.
k SEEK >I : Press the right or the left arrow to go to 2. Press AM FM to select AM, FMI or FM2.
the next or to the previous station and stay there. 3. Tune in the desired station.
The radio will seek only to stations that are in the 4. Press AUTO EQ to select the equalization that
selected band and only to those with a strong signal. best suits the type of station selected.
k SCAN >I : Press and hold either SCAN arrow 5. Press and hold one of the six numbered
pushbuttons until you hear a beep. Whenever you
for two seconds until SC appears on the display and
press that numbered pushbutton, the station
you hear a beep. The radio will go to a station, play
you set will return and the equalization that you
for a few seconds, then go on to the next station.
selected will also be automatically selected for
Press either SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.
that pushbutton.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SCAN 6. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
arrow for more than four seconds. PRESET SCAN will
appear on the display. You will hear a double beep.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on your
pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next preset station. Press either SCAN arrow again
to stop scanning presets.
The radio will scan only to stations that are in the
selected band and only to those with a strong signal.

3-81
Setting the Tone (BasdTreble)
AUDIO: Push the AUDIO knob until BASS, MID or
TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to increase
or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy, you may
want to decrease the treble.
To adjust bass, midrange or treble to the middle
position, select BASS, MID or TREB and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will produce one beep
and adjust the display level to zero.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. The radio will produce
one beep and CENTERED will appear on the display.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this
button to choose between bass, midrange and treble
equalization settings designed for country, jazz,
talk, pop, rock and classical program types.
To return to the manual mode (CUSTOM), press the
AUTO EQ button until CUSTOM appears on the display.
Then you will be able to manually adjust the bass,
midrange and treble using the AUDIO knob.
3-82
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push the AUDIO knob until
BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to move
the sound toward the left or the right speakers.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and hold the AUDIO knob until FAD appears on
the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward the
front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance and the fade to the middle
position, select balance or fade and push and hold
the AUDIO knob. The radio will beep once and
will adjust the display level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. The radio will
produce one beep and CENTERED will appear on
the display.
Using RBS
Your audio system is equipped with a Radio Data
System (RDS). RDS features are available for use only
on FM stations that broadcast RDS information.
Using this system, the radio can do the following:
Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type of
programming,
* receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies,
e display messages from radio stations, and
* seek to stations with traffic announcements.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While you are tuned to an RDS station, the station
I-IXII~: VI ii-le ! A i ieiiers wiii appear UII iile uispiay irrsieaa
of the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming and the name of the program being
broadcast.
Finding a PTY Station
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob.
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press either
SEEK arrow to select the category and take you to
the category’s first station.
4. If you want to go to another station within that
category and the category is displayed, press
either SEEK arrow once. If the category is not
displayed, press either SEEK arrow twice to display
the category and then to go to another station.
5. If PTY times out and is no longer on the display,
go back to Step 1.
If both P-TYPE and TRAF are on, the radio will
search for stations with the selected PTY and traffic
announcements.
To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and hold the
P-TYPE button until you hear a beep on the PTY
you want to interrupt with. When selected, an asterisk
will appear beside that PTY on the display. You may
select multiple interrupts if desired. When you are
listening to a compact disc, the last selected RDS station
vi!! interrunt
r rn!ay if that selected program type f ~ r m a t
is broadcast.
3-83
SCAN: You can also scan through the channels within Setting Preset PTYs
a category by performing the following:
The six numbered pushbuttons let you return to your
1. Press the P-TYPE button. P-TYPE and the last
favorite PTYs. These buttons have factory PTY presets.
selected PTY will be displayed on the screen.
You can set up to 12 PTYs (six FMI and six FM2) by
2. Select a category by turning the P-TYPE knob. performing the following steps:
3. Once the desired category is displayed, press and 1. Press BAND to select FMI or FM2.
hold either SCAN arrow, and the radio will begin
2. Press the P-TYPE button to activate program type
scanning within your chosen category.
select mode.
4. Press either SCAN arrow again to stop at a 3. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.
particular station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
AM FM (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency until you hear a beep. Whenever you press that
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the numbered pushbutton, the PTY you set will return.
same program type. Press and hold AM FM for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency on. AF ON 5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton
will appear on the display. The radio may switch to
stronger stations. Press and hold AM FM again for two
seconds to turn alternate frequency off. AF OFF will
appear on the display. The radio will not switch to other
stations. When you turn the ignition off and then on
again, the alternate frequency feature will automatically
be turned on.

3-84
RDS Messages
ALERT!: Alert warns of local or national emergencies.
When an alert announcement comes on the current
radio station, ALERT! will appear onthe display. You will
hear the announcement, even if the volume is muted
or a compact disc is playing. If the compact disc player
is playing, play will stop during the announcement.
You will not be able to turn off alert announcements.
ALERT! will not be affected by tests of the emergency
broadcast system. This feature is not supported by
all RDS stations.
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist and song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
If the whole message is not displayed, parts of it
will appear every three seconds. To scroll through the
message at your own speed, press the INFO button
repeatedly. A new group of words will appear on
ine aispiay wiin each press. Gnce ihe corrrpieie
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The old message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button until a new message is received or a
different station is tuned to.
TRAF (Traffic): TRAF will appear on the display if the
tuned station broadcasts traffic announcements. To
receive the traffic announcement from the tuned station,
press this button. Brackets will be displayed around
TRAF and when a traffic announcement comes on the
tuned radio station you will hear it.
If the current tuned station does not broadcast traffic
announcements, press this button and the radio
will seek to a station that does. When the radio finds a
station that broadcasts traffic announcements, it will
stop. Brackets will be displayed around TRAF and
when a traffic announcement comes on the tuned
radio station you will hear it. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
Traffic Interrupt Feature: Your radio can interrupt the
play of a CD. Press the TRAF button. The radio will
seek to a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.
When the radio finds a station that broadcasts traffic
announcements, it will stop. Brackets around TRAF will
appear on the display. When a traffic announcement
comes on the station that was found, you will hear
it. When the traffic announcement is over, the radio
will resume play of the CD. If no station is found,
NO TRAFFIC will appear on the display.
3-85
Playing a Compact Disc
If an error appears on the display, see “Compact Disc
Messages” later in this section.
LOAD CD 4 : Press the LOAD side of this button to
load CDs into the compact disc player. This compact
disc player will hold up to six discs.
To insert one disc, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD side of the
LOAD CD button.
3. Wait for the light, located to the right of the slot, to
turn green.
4. Load a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the disc in.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If you select an equalization setting for your
disc, it will be activated each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the disc will begin to play
automatically.
3-86
To insert multiple discs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD side of the LOAD CD
button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the light, located to the
right of the slot, will begin to flash.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green, load
a disc. Insert the disc partway into the slot, label
side up. The player will pull the disc in.
Once the disc is loaded, the light will begin flashing
again. Once the light stops flashing and turns green
you can load another disc. The disc player takes up
to six discs. Do not try toload more than six.
To load more than one disc but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When you have finished loading
discs, with the radio on or off, press the LOAD side of
the LOAD CD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
When a disc is inserted, the CD symbol will be
displayed. If more than one disc has been loaded, a
number for each disc will be displayed. If you select an
equalization setting for your disc, it will be activated
each time you play a disc.
If the radio is on or off, the last disc loaded will begin to
play automatically.
As each new track starts to play, the track number will
appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded
Compact Disc
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the radio
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button to start playing a CD. Then press the numbered
pushbutton that corresponds to the CD you want to
play. A small bar will appear under the CD number that
is playing, and the track number will appear.
If an error appears on the radio display, see “Compact
Disc Messages’’ later in this section.
LOAD CD A (Eject): Pressing the CD eject side of
this button will eject a single disc or multiple discs.
To eject the disc that is currently playing, press
and release this button. To eject multiple discs, press
and hold this button for two seconds. You will hear
a beep and the light will flash to let you know when a
disc is being ejected.
REMOVE CD will be displayed. You can now remove
the disc. If the disc is not removed, after 25 seconds, the
disc will be automatically pulled back into the receiver.
If you try to push the disc back into the receiver,
before the 25 second time period is complete, the
receiver will sense an error and will try to eject the disc
several times before stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject side of the
LOAD CD eject button to eject a disc after you have
tried to push it in manually. The receivers 25-second
eject timer will reset at each press of eject, which
will cause the receiver to not eject the disc until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
Once the player stops and the disc is ejected, remove the
disc. After removing the disc, press the PWR knoboff and
then on again. This will clear the disc-sensing feature and
enable discs to beloaded into the player again.
< REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.
FWD >> (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release it to play the passage.
The display will show elapsed time.
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, you can repeat one track
or an entire disc. To use repeat, do the following:
To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
@
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn it off.
@ To repeat the disc you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn itoff.
3-87
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
disc or on all of the discs. To use random, do one
of the following:
To play the tracks on the disc you are listening to in
random order, press and hold RDM for more than
two seconds. You will hear a beep and RANDOM
ONE will appear on the display. Press RDM again to
turn it off.
To play the tracks on all of the discs that are
loaded in random order, press and release the RDM
button. RANDOM ALL will appear on the display.
Press RDM again to turn it off.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the desired equalization setting while playing
a compact disc. The equalization will be automatically
set whenever you play a compact disc. For more
information on AUTO EQ, see "AUTO EQ" listed
previously in this section.
k SEEK >I : Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have passed.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If you
press the button more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the disc.
3-88
k SCAN >I : To scan one disc, press and hold either
SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of each track of the
currently selected disc. SCAN will appear on the display.
Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
To scan all loaded discs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until DISC SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. Use this
feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first tracks of each
disc loaded. Press either SCAN arrow again, to stop
scanning.
RCL (Recall): Push this knob to see how long the
current track has been playing. To change the default
on the display (track and elapsed time), push the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
AM FM: Press this button to play the radio when a
disc(s) is in the player.
Using Song List Mode
The integrated six-disc CD changer has a feature called
song list. This feature is capable of saving 20 track
selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on and load it with at least
one disc. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this
section for more information.
2. Check to see that the disc changer is not in song
list mode. S-LIST should not appear in the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST
button to turn it off.
3. Select the desired disc by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK SCAN right
arrow button to locate the track that you want
to save. The track will begin to play.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two or
more seconds to savethe track into memory.
When SONG LIST is pressed a beep will be heard
immediately. After two seconds of pressing SONG
LIST continuously, two beeps will sound to confirm
that the track has been saved.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
If you attempt to save more than 20 selections,
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on
the display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order that they were saved.
You may seek through the song list by using the SEEK
SCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will
return you to the first saved track.
3-89
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select the desired
track to be deleted.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When pressing SONG LIST, one beep
will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of pressing the SONG LIST button continuously,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will beadded to the end of the list.
3-90
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the disc player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. A beep will be heard, followed
by two beeps after two seconds anda final beep will
be heard after four seconds. S-LIST EMPTY will
appear on the display indicating that the song
list has been deleted.
If a disc is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that disc, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
Compact Disc Messages Entertainment System
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the radio Your vehicle may have an optional Digital Video Disc
display, it could be due to one of the following reasons: (DVD) entertainment system. The entertainment system
works with the vehicle’s audio system and includes a
You’re driving on a very rough road. When the
DVD player, a video display screen, headphones and a
road becomes smoother, the disc should play. remote control. The entertainment system also integrates
The disc is dirty, scratched, wet or upside down. the rear climate control and rear seat audio functions.
The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and Before You Drive
try again.
The video entertainment system is for passengers in
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason, the second and third row seats only. The driver cannot
try a known good CD. safely view the video screen while driving and should
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error can’t be not try to do so.
corrected, contact your dealer. If your radio displays In severe or extreme weather conditions your
an error message, write it down and provide it to your entertainment system will shut down until the
dealer when reporting the problem. temperature is within the operating range. This
protection feature will keep your video components
from being damaged while the temperature is below
-4°F (-20°C) or above 140°F (60°C). To resume
operation, shut off the entertainment system, pull down
LL- ‘A-- --A SL-, Leer ---I SL- .,-L:#.l-
11I C viucu ~ ~ I GI C
a 1I I U LI IGI I I I c a L VI I I C VGI I I ~ I G
~ U V LI

until the temperature is within the operating range.

3-91
Headphones If you move too far forward, step out of the vehicle or
break the “line of sight” between the headphones
The entertainment system and the display above the video screen, the sound in
includes dual channel, the headphones will be degraded or will cut out entirely.
wireless headphones. If the system is shut off, or the headphones are out
The headphones have of the “line of sight” for more than three minutes,
an ON/OFF switch, the headphones will shut off automatically to preserve
a channel A/B switch battery life.
and a volume control. If the channel switch located on the right side is on A,
the headphones will play the DVD or auxiliary device.
See “Stereo RCA Jacks” later in this section for
more information. If the channel switch is on B, the
headphones will play the rear seat audio system.
See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) (Without Entertainment
System) on page 3-98 or Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(With Entertainmenf System) on page 3-100 for more
To use the headphones, turn the switch located on the information.
left side to ON. An indicator light located on the right To adjust the volume on the headphones, use the
side will illuminate. If the light does not illuminate, volume control located on the right side.
the batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section for more information. Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
Switch the headphones to OFF when not in use. direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool place.

3-92
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Slide open the battery door located on the left side
of the headphones.
2. Rplace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly.
3. Sde the battery door shut.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located on the faceplate of the DVD
player. They allow you to hook up an auxiliary device
such as a camcorder or a video game unit. You may
require adapter connectors or cables to connect
your auxiliary device to the RCA jacks. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper usage.
To use the auxiliary function, connect a camcorder or a
video game unit to the RCA jacks and turn on the
auxiliary device. If you want to view a DVD, insert the
DVD into the DVD player. The system will automatically
switch to DVD and start to play. To switch between
the auxiliary device and the DVD, press the SOURCE
button on the DVD player or on the remote control.
See “DVD Player” and “Remote Control’’ later in
this section for more information. When the auxiliary
device is the source for the entertainment system,
TRACK 99 will appear on the radio display. This
is normal.
Audio Speakers
Only one audio source can be heard through the
speakers at one time.
Audio from the radio, cassette or CD player will be
heard through all speakers when the front audio system
is being used and the rear seat audio system is off.
Sound from the DVD player or an auxiliary device can
be heard through all speakers when the front audio
system and rear seat audio are off and a DVD or
auxiliary device is playing.
When the front audio system is on, to hear the DVD,
auxiliary device or the rear seat audio system you must
use the headphones. With the rear seat audio system
c::, the spesker I: the !?/e!-hex! C2rrSClE 2zd the
rear speakers are muted.
The speaker in the overhead console is set at a low
level and is not intended to be heard at a high volume.
3-93
Video Screen If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked
position, the screen will shut off, but the DVD will continue
to play through the previously selected audio source.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen, as
damage may occur. Do not touch the video screen.
See “Cleaning the Video Screen” in the Index
for more information.

DVD Player

The video screen is located in the overhead console.

To use the video screen, do the following:
1 . Push forward on the release button and the screen
will fold down.
2. Pull the screen toward you and adjust its position
as desired.
When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its
locked position.
The DVD player is located in the front floor console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and by the buttons on the remote control.
See “Remote Control’’ later in this section for more
information.
The DVD player works while the ignition is in RUN or
ACCESSORY and while RAP is active. See “Retained
Accessory Power (RAP)” under Ignition Positions
on page 2-32.

3-94
The entertainment system is only compatible with DVDs
authorized for use in the United States and Canada.
Regular audio CDs can also be played by the DVD
player. Home recorded CDs (CDRs) may not play in this
DVD player. Try the audio system CD player instead.
DVD Player Buttons
SOURCE: Press this button to switch the source for the
entertainment system between the auxiliary device
(connected to the RCA jacks) and the DVD player.
Pressing this button has no effect when there is
no auxiliary device connected.
D / 11 (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play.
Press while playing to pause. Press it again to continue
playing.
0/ A (Stop/Eject): Press this button to stop playing.
Press the button a second time to eject the disc.
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot until it stops. The DVD player
will continue loading the disc and the player will
automatically start.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the face of the player or on the remote control.
Some DVDs will not allow you to fast forward or skip the
copyright or previews. Some DVDs willbegin playing the
movie automatically after the previews have finished
(although there may be a delay of up to 30seconds).
If the DVD does not begin playing the movie
automatically, press the play/pause button on the face
of the DVD player or the remote control. If the DVD still
does not play, refer to the on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop a disc, press the stop/eject button on the DVD
player. To resume playback, press the play/pause
button. As long as you have not ejected the disc, it will
resume playback from the point where it was stopped.
If the disc has been ejected, the player will start playing
at the beginning of the disc.
Ejecting a Disc
Press the stop/eject button on the DVD player once to
- ----
_ I _ .^ - .^ ^I .- -1 I!.--- I- -
-: -
^I 11- -
-I!-
S1Uf.J dl I U d SeLUI IU 111 I l C L U CJCLL 11 le UISL.
If a disc is ejected from the player, but not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short
period of time.
3-95
Remote Control Remote Control Buttons
To use the remote control, aim it at the display above
the video screen and press the desired button.
Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the ability
of the entertainment system to receive signals from
the remote control. Be sure the remote’s batteries are
not discharged, as this will also affect the function of the
remote control. Objects blocking the line of sight may
also affect the function of the remote control.
Notice: Do not store the remote control in heat or
direct sunlight.This could damage the remote
control and would not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the remote control stored in a cool, dry place.

Volume A : Press the up or the down arrow to

increase or to decrease volume.

,/I1 (Play/Pause): Press this button to play a disc.

Press this button while a disc is playing to pause.
Press it again to continue playing. If you press and hold
this button for three seconds or more, the DVD player
will turn off.

3-96
b Fwd/( Rev (Fast Forward/Reverse): Press the Battery Replacement
right or left arrow once to fast forward or reverse To change the batteries, do the following:
the DVD. To resume play, press the button again or
press the Play/Pause button. Pressing and holding an 1. Remove the screw and open the battery door
arrow will fast forward or fast reverse the DVD and play located on the back of the remote control.
will resume when the arrow is released. These buttons 2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright Make sure that they are installed correctly.
or the previews.
3. Replace the battery door and screw.
A NexVV Prev (NexVPrevious): Press the up or the If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
down arrow to select thenext or the previous chapter. time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
These buttons may not work when the DVD is playing dry place.
the copyright or the previews.
Menu: Press this button to view the media menu.
The media menuis different on every disc. Use the up
and the down andthe right and the left arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the media menu. After making
your selection, press Enter. Somediscs may contain a
short skit leading up to the
media menu.
Source: Press this button to switch the source for the
nm+mrCo;nmnnt +.r++nm hn+lIrnnrr +hn - I a v ; l i - - q r n l n l r ; n n
I1 3 y J L G l I 1 U G L V W G G I I L I I G UUAIIIUI
GI IIG1 I U I I I 1 I I C 5 1 y U G V IUG

(connected to the RCA jacks) and the DVD player.

Pressing this button has no effect when there is
no auxiliary device connected.

3-97
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Rear Seat Radio Controls
(Without Entertainment System)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to
and control any of the music sources: radio, cassette
tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear
seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD
through headphones, while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers
have control of the volume for each set of headphones.
Be aware that the front seat audio controls always
have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat
passengers switch the source for the main radio The following functions are controlled by the RSA
to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote system buttons:
source. The rear speakers will be muted when the
RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on or off.
functions even when the main radio is off.
VOL (Volume): Press this knob lightly so it extends.
Primary Radio Controls Turn the knob to increase or to decrease volume.
Push the knob back into its stored position when you’re
The following function is controlled by the knob on the not using it. The upper VOL knob controls the upper
main radio: headphone and the lower VOL knob controls the lower
headphone.
PWR (Power): Push this knob twice to turn RSA off.

3-98
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1 PSET PROG (Preset Program): The front passengers
and FM2. If the front passengers are already listening must be listening to something different for each of
to the radio, the RSA controller will not switch between these functions to work:
the bands and cannot change the frequency. Press 0 Press this button to scan through the preset radio
this button to play a cassette tape or a compact
stations set on the pushbuttons on the main radio.
disc when listening to the radio.
The radio will go to a preset station stored on
SEEK v
: While listening to the radio, press the up your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then go
on to the next preset station. Press this button
or the down arrow to tune to the next or the previous
again to stop scanning presets.
station and stay there. The SEEK button is inactive if the
front radio is in use. When a cassette tape is playing, press this button
to go to the other side of the tape.
While listening to a cassette tape, press the up or the
down arrow to hear the next or the previous selection. When a CD is playing, press this button to select a
The SEEK button is inactive if the tape mode on disc.
the front radio is in use.
TAPE CD: Press this button to switch between playing
While listening to a CD, press the up arrow to hear the a cassette tape or a compact disc when listening to
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go the radio. The inactive tape or compact disc will remain
back to the start of the current track (if more than eight safely inside the radio for future listening.
seconds have played). The SEEK button is inactive
if the CD mode on the front radio is in use.
Tn e n m n et-tinne m c n ~ c - rr-4 hnlrl n m n n J +hn C C C W
I w J b U I I O ~ U ~ 1 to,
V I P' Gad Ul I U I I W l U V I I c i V I L I 1 - z U L L l \

arrows until the radio goes into scan mode. The radio
will scan to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on
to the next station. Press SEEK again to stop scanning.
The scan function is inactive if front radio is in use.

3-99
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
(With Entertainment System)
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to
and control any of the music sources: radio, cassette
tapes and CDs. However, the rear seat passengers
can only control the music sources that the front seat
passengers are not listening to. For example, rear
seat passengers may listen to a cassette tape or CD
through headphones while the driver listens to the radio
through the front speakers. The rear seat passengers The following functions are controlled by the RSA
have control of the volume for each set of headphones. system buttons:
Be aware that the front seat audio controls always RSA PWR (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on
have priority over the RSA controls. If the front seat or off. The headphone symbol will appear on the display
passengers switch the source for the main radio above the video screen when the system is on.
to a remote source, the RSA will play the same remote
AM FM: Press this button to switch between AM, FM1
source. The rear speakers will be muted when the
and FM2 when the headphones are on channel B.
RSA power is turned on. You may operate the RSA
The selected radio station frequency will appear on the
functions even when the main radio is off. display above the video screen. If the front passengers
are already listening to the radio, the RSA controller
will not switch between the bands and cannot change
the frequency.
4 (Tune) b : While listening to the radio, press the
right or the left arrow to tune to the next or the previous
station and stay there. These arrows are inactive if
the front radio is in use.

3-100
While listening to a cassette tape, press the right arrow to
hear the nextselection on the tape. Press the left arrow to
go backto the previous selection. These arrows are
inactive if the tape mode onthe front radio is inuse.
While listening to a CD,press the right arrow to hear the
next track onthe CD. Pressthe left arrow to go backto
the startof the current track (if morethan eight seconds
have played). Thesearrows are inactive if the CD mode
on the front radio is in use.
P.SET SCAN (Preset Scan): The front passengers
must be listening to something different for each of
these functions to work:
Press and hold this button to scan through the
preset radio stations set on the pushbuttons on the
main radio. The radio will go to a preset station
stored on your pushbuttons, play for a few seconds,
then go on to the next preset station. This feature
will only scan the presets that are in the selected
band. The selected radio station frequency will
appear on the display above the video screen.
Przss this !x::sn zgzi;; tz step scznzizcj pi-esek
If your vehicle is equipped with the AM-FM Radio
with Cassette Tape and Compact Disc Player
with Radio Data System (RDS) and Automatic Tone
Control, press this button to go to the other side
of the tape when a cassette tape is playing.
0 If your vehicle has the AM-FM Radio with Six-Disc
Compact Disc Player with Equalization and Radio
Data System (RDS), press this button to switch
to playing a different CD when multiple CDs
are loaded into the CD player.
CD TAPE: Press this button to switch between playing
a cassette tape, a compact disc, a DVD or anauxiliary
device when the headphones are on channel B. If one
of the devices is not loaded, the system will skip
over the device when this button is pressed.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK@is designed to discourage theft of your
radio. The feature works automatically by learning
a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
If the radio is moved to a different vehicle, it will
not operate and LOCKED will be displayed.
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, your radio
may have a blinking red light that indicates that
THEFTLQCK IC 2rme.l.
With THEFPLOCK activated, your radio will not operate
if stolen.
3-101
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
If your vehicle has this feature, you can control certain
radio functions using the buttons on your steering wheel.
A SEEK v : Press the up or the down arrow to seek
to the next or to the previous station. When playing
a cassette tape or compact disc, press the up arrow to
hear the next selection.
3-102
PROG (Program): Press this button to choose AM,
FM1 or FM2.
PRESET: Press this button to scan you preset stations.
The radio will scan to a preset station, play for a few
seconds, then go on to the next preset station. The
display will show your selections. Press this button again
to stop scanning preset stations.
A VOL (Volume) v : Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease volume.
PLAY: Press this button to play a loaded cassette tape
or compact disc when listening to the radio.
MUTE: Press this button to silence the system. Press it
again to turn on the sound. This button may be used
when listening to the radio, a cassette tape or a
compact disc.
DVD Distortion
You may experience video distortion when operating
cellular phones, scanners, CB radios, Global Position
Systems (GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or
walkie talkies.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player when
operating one of these devices in or near the vehicle.
*Excludes the Onstar@System.
Understanding Radio Reception
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range, however, can
cause stations to interfere with each other. AM can pick
up noise from things like storms and power lines. Try
reducing the treble to reduce this noise if you ever get it.
FM
FM stereo will give you the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to come and go.
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight and
extreme heat. If they aren’t, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
Your tape player should be cleaned regularly after
every 50 hours of use. Your radio may display CLEAN
to indicate that you have used your tape player for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
If this message appears on the display, your cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but you should clean it as soon as possible
to prevent damage to your tapes and player. If you
notice a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cieaning casseiie wirn pads wnicn scrub tne tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available
through your dealership.
3-103
The broken tape detection feature of your cassette
tape player may identify the cleaning cassette as
a damaged tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning
cassette from being ejected, use the following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE CD button for five
seconds. READY will appear on the display and
a cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
After the cleaning cassette is ejected, the broken tape
detection feature will be active again.
You may also choose a non-scrubbing action, wet-type
cleaner which uses a cassette with a fabric belt to
clean the tape head. This type of cleaning cassette will
not eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner
may not clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type
cleaner. The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type
cleaning cassette is not recommended.
3-1 04
After you clean the player, press and hold the EJT
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display CLEANED to show the indicator
was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before you have your tape
player serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle discs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct sunlight
and dust. If the surface of a disc is soiled, dampen
a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution
and clean it, wiping from the center to the edge.
Be sure never to touch the side without writing when
handling discs. Pick up discs by grasping the outer
edges or the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Care of Your CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaner discs is not advised, due to
the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
Cleaning Your DVD Player Fixed Mast Antenna
When cleaning the outside DVD cabinet face and The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
buttons, use only a clean cloth dampened with without being damaged. If the mast should ever
clean water. become slightly bent, you can straighten it out by hand.
If the mast is badly bent, as it might
- be by vandals,
Cleaning
the
Video
Screen you should replace it.
Check occasionally to be sure the mast is still tightened
WhenCleaning the videoScreen,UseOnly a Clean cloth to the fender. If tightening is required, tighten by
dampenedwithcleanwater.Usecarewhen directly hand, then witha wrench onequarter turn.
touching or cleaning the screen, as damage may result.

3-105
b NOTES

3-106
 Section Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving. the Road. and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ........................................... 4.2
Drunken Driving ............................................. 4.3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-6
Braking ......................................................... 4.6
Traction Control System (TCS) ....................... 4.10
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System ....................... 4-1 1
Steering ...................................................... 4.12
Off-Road Recovery ....................................... 4.14
Passing ........................................ ....4.14
Loss of Control .................................. ....4.16
Driving at Night ......................................... 4.17
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
City Driving .................................................. 4.21
Freeway Driving ............................... .....4.22
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ....................... 4-23
Highway Hypnosis ........................................ 4-24
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................ 4-24
Winter Driving .............................................. 4.26
If YouAreStuck: In Sand,Mud,
Ice or Snow .............................................. 4-30
Towing .......................................................... 4-32
Towing Your Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................... 4-32
Loading Your Vehicle .................................... 4-34
Towing a Trailer .............................. .....4-36
4- 1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is:
Drive defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-22.
Defensive driving really means “be ready for anything.”
On city streets, rural roads or freeways, it means
“always expect the unexpected.”
Assume that pedestrians or other drivers are going to
be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do. Be ready for their mistakes.
4-2
Rear-end collisions are about the most preventable of
accidents. Yet they are common. Allow enough following
distance. It’s the best defensive driving maneuver,
in both city and rural driving. You never know when
the vehicle in front of you is going to brake or turn
suddenly.
Defensive driving requires that a driver concentrate on
the driving task. Anything that distracts from the
driving task - such as concentrating on a cellular
telephone call, reading, or reaching for something on
the floor - makes proper defensive driving more difficult
and can even cause a collision, with resulting injury.
Ask a passenger to help do things like this, or pull off the
road in a safe place to do them yourself. These simple
defensive driving techniques could save your life.
Drunken Driving Many adults - by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population - choose never to drink alcohol, so they
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
a national tragedy. It’s the number one contributor to it’s against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims There are good medical, psychological and
every year. developmental reasons for these laws.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
drive a vehicle: safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
Judgment
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It’s a lot less than
Muscular Coordination many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
Vision
the problem.
Attentiveness.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
Police records show that almost half of all motor who is drinking depends upon four things:
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases, The amount of alcohol consumed
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than 0 The drinker’s body weight
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been e The amount of food that is consumed before and
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
during drinking
300,000 people injured.
a Thn Innmth
I IIU
-<
I ~ B B Y L
+;-e
VI ILIIIIG
;+ h-0
IL I t u
I-lrnr.
~
+Ire
L a n a ~LI IC
Av:-l~--
utlllnG1
+-
LU

consume the alcohol.

4-3
According to the American Medical Association,
a 180 Ib (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce
(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a
BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1 - 1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of a liquor like whiskey, gin or vodka.
4-4
It’s the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher
BAC level than a man of her same body weight when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in an increasing number of U.S. states, and
throughout Canada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent.
In some other countries, the limit is even lower. For
example, it is 0.05 percent in both France and Germany.
The BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United
States is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we’ve seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
Statistics show that the chanceof being ina collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “1’11 be careful” isn’t the
right answer. What if there’s an emergency, a need to
take sudden action, as when a child darts into the
street? A person with even a moderate BAC might not
be able to react quickly enoughto avoid the collision.
rhere’s something else about drinking and driving that
many people don’t know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord or heart. This means that when anyone who
has been drinking - driver or passenger - is in
a crash, that person’s chance of being killed or
permanently disabled is higher than if the person
had not been drinking.
Drir
ng and the1 ing is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness and
judgement can be affected by evena small
amount of alcohol. You can havea serious - or
even fatal -collision if you drive after drinking.
Please don’t drink and drive or ride with a driver
who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if
.PA~I’Y- ..,;+cI n N- e l m - ; ~ m n + n n 4 w L . n ~..#he ...:I1
ywu 1\;5 U U I L I I a ymuup, uGaIy’larG a UllVtl V U i I W V Y i i I
not drink.
4-5
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. Theyare the brakes, the steering and
the accelerator. All three systems haveto do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you’re driving on snow or ice,
it’s easy to ask more of those control systems than the
tires and road can provide. That means you can lose
control of your vehicle.
4-6
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That’s perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That’s reaction time.
Average reaction time is about 3/4 of a second.
But that’s only an average. It might be less with one
driver and as longas two or three seconds or more with
another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination
and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs
and frustration. But even in 3/4 of a second, a vehicle
moving at 60 mph (I00 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m).
That could be a lot of distance in an emergency,
so keeping enough space between your vehicle and
others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road (whether it’s pavement
or gravel); the condition of the road (wet, dry, icy);
tire tread; the condition of your brakes; the weight of
the vehicle and the amount of brake force applied.
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
in spurts - heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking - rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is Your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes. ABS is an
a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to cool advanced electronic braking system that will help
between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out much prevent a braking skid.
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances, If your vehicle has anti-lock
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. brakes, this warning light
That means better braking and longer brake life. on the instrument panel will
come on briefly when
If your engine ever stops while you’re driving, brake you start your vehicle.
normally but don’t pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and When you start your engine, or when you begin to
the brake pedal will be harder to push. drive away, your anti-lock brake system will check
itself. You may hear a momentary motor or clicking
noise while this test is going on, and you may even
notice that your brake pedal moves or pulses a little.
This is normal.

4-7
 The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and road
conditions. This can help you steer around the obstacle
while braking hard.

Let’s say the road is wet and you’re driving safely.

Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here’s what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
will separately work the brakes at each wheel. on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.

4-8
Remember: Anti-lock doesn’t change the time you need
to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to the
vehicle in front of you, you won’t have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Don’t pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal down
firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel a
slight brake pedal pulsation or notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
At some time, nearly every driver gets into a situation
that requires hard braking.
If you have anti-lock, you can steer and brake at the
same time. However, if you don’t have anti-lock,
your first reaction - to hit the brake pedal hard
and hold it down - mav be the wronq thina to do.
Your wheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehicle
can’t respond to your steering. Momentum will carry
it in whatever direction it was headed when the wheels
stopped rolling. That could be off the road, into the
very thing you were trying to avoid, or into traffic.
If you don’t have anti-lock, use a “squeeze” braking
technique. This will give you maximum braking while
maintaining steering control. You can do this by pushing
on the brake pedal with steadily increasing pressure.
In an emergency, you will probably want to squeeze
the brakes hard without locking the wheels. If you hear
or feel the wheels sliding, ease off the brake pedal.
This will help you retain steering control. If you do have
anti-lock, it’s different. See “Anti-Lock Brakes.”
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-9
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may have a traction control system that
limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in slippery
road conditions. The system operates only if it senses
that one or both of the front wheels are spinning or
beginning to lose traction. When this happens,
the system works the front brakes and reduces engine
power to limit wheel spin.
The TRACTION ACTIVE message will come on when
the traction control system is limiting wheel spin.
See Traction Active Message on page 3-53. You may
feel or hear the system working, but this is normal.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the traction
control system begins to limit wheel spin, the cruise
control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to safely use it again, you may
reengage the cruise control. See “Cruise Control’’ under
Turn SignaVMultifunction Lever on page 3-7.
4-10
SERVICE
TRACTION
SYSTEM
United States Canada
If this message comes on and stays on or comes on
while you are driving, there’s a problem with your
traction control system.
See Service Traction System Warning Message on
page 3-52. When this warning message is on, the TRAC
OFF light will come on to remind you that the system
will not limit wheel spin. Adjust your driving accordingly.
The traction control system automatically comes on
whenever youstart your vehicle.To limit wheel spin,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should always
leave the system on. But you canturn the traction control
system off if you ever need to. Youshould turn the
system off if your vehicle ever gets stuckin sand, mud or
snow and rocking the vehicleis required. See “Rocking
Your Vehicle” under If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice
or Snow on page 4-30.
 To turn the system off,
press the TCS button
located on the instrument
panel switchbank.
If the System is hliting wheel Spin when YOU press the
button, the tractionactivemessage will go off, but
the system will not turn off until there is no longer a
current need to limit wheel spin. The TRAC OFF light will
come on to remind you the system is off. You can
turn the system back on at any time by pressing the
button again. The traction control system warning
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) System
If your vehicle has all-wheel drive (AWD), the AWD
system operates automatically without any action
required by the driver. If the front drive wheels begin
to slip, the rear wheels will automatically begin to
drive the vehicle as required. There may be a slight
engagement noise during hard use but this is normal.
During heavy AWD applications, the engine torque
may be reducedto protect AWD system components.
If the vehicle is exposed to extended heavy AWDusage,
the AWD systemwill shut itself off to protect the system
from overheatinq. When the system cools down, the
AWD system will activate itself again automatically; this
cool-down can take up to 20 minutes depending on
outside temperature and vehicle use.See All-Wheel
DriveDisableWarningMessage on page 3-59.
4-1 1
Steering
Power Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
Driving on Curves
It’s important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here’s why:
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there’s no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you’ve ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you’ll understand this.
The traction you can getin a curve depends onthe
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle at
which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you’re
in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.
4-12
Suppose you’re steering through a sharp curve. Then you
suddenly accelerate. Both control systems - steering
and braking - have to do their work where thetires meet
the road. Unless you havefour-wheel anti-lock brakes,
adding the hard braking can demand too muchof those
places. You can lose control.
The same thing can happen if you’re steering through a
sharp curve and you suddenly accelerate. Those two
control systems - steering and acceleration- can
overwhelm those places where thetires meet the road
and make youlose control. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page4- 10.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way
you want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions.
Under less favorable conditions you’ll want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your front
wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through the
curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. Wait to
accelerate until you are out of the curve, and then
accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or achild darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You can
avoid these problems by braking - if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you can’t; there isn’t room.
That’s the time for evasive action - steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
like these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision.
Then steer around the problem, to the left or right An emergency like this requires close attention and a
depending on the space available. quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
. ~ \ r n i r l n d+ho nhinnt
U ”V l U V U L, I”
“ U , V V L .

The fact that such emergency situations are always

possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.

4-13
Off-Road Recovery
You mayfind that your right wheels have dropped offthe
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you’re driving.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts the
pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel to
go straight down the roadway.
4-14
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents - the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
e “Drive ahead.” Look down the road, to the sides
and to crossroads for situations that might affect
your passing patterns. If you have any doubt
whatsoever about making a successful pass,
wait for a better time.
e Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
A broken center line usually indicates it’s all
right to pass (providing the road ahead is clear).
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you’re awaiting an opportunity.
For one thing, following too closely reduces your
area of vision, especially if you’re following a larger
vehicle. Also, you won’t have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and
don’t get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move
into the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you
will have a “running start” that more than makes
up for the distance you would lose by dropping
back. And if something happens to cause you to
cancel your pass, you need only slow down
and drop back again and wait for another
opportunity.
If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone isn’t
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
venicie. Fiemember io yiance over your sirouicjer
and check the blind spot.
Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and
start your left lane change signal before moving
out of the right lane to pass. When you are
far enough ahead of the passed vehicle to see its
front in your inside mirror, activate your right
lane change signal and move back into the right
lane. (Remember that your right outside mirror
is convex. The vehicle you just passed may seem
to be farther away from you than it really is.)
0 Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time
on two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing
the next vehicle.
0 Don’t overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
0 If you’re being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps
you can ease a little to the right.
4-15
Loss of Control
Let’s review what driving experts say about what happens
when the three control systems (brakes, steering and
acceleration) don’t have enoughfriction where the tires
meet the road to do what the driver has asked.
In any emergency, don’t give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of
less danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not “overdriving”
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
aren’t rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much
speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose
cornering force. And in theacceleration skid, too much
throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If you have the Traction Control System, remember:
It helps avoid only the acceleration skid. If you do not
have this system, or if the system is off, then an
acceleration skid is also best handled by easing your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
4-16
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel or other material is on the road. For safety, you’ll
want to slow down and adjust your driving to these
conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer and
vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration or
braking (including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear). Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning
clues - such as enough water, ice or packed snow
on the road to make a “mirrored surface” - and slow
down when you have any doubt.
If you have the anti-lock braking system, remember:
It helps avoid only the braking skid. if you do not have
anti-lock, then in a braking skid (where the wheels
are no longer rolling), release enough pressure on the
brakes to get the wheels rolling again. This restores
steering control. Push the brake pedal down steadily
when you have to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels
are rolling, you will have steering control.
Driving at Night Here are some tips on night driving.
Drive defensively.
Don’t drink and drive.
0 Adjust your inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
Since you can’t see as well, you may need to slow
down and keep more space between you and
other vehicles.
Slow down, especially on higher speed roads. Your
headlamps can light up only so much road ahead.
In remote areas, watch for animals.
0 If you’re tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
Night driving is more dangerousthan day driving. One
: ~ is that
8 s s~
z e &j\,lers
~ ~ ph!!
2rf! be impaired - by What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue. vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you’re
driving, don’t wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.

4-17
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to readjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare (as from a
driver who doesn’t lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps), slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep your windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean - inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that your headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your
eyes moving; that way, it’s easier to pick out dimly
lighted objects. Just as your headlamps should be
checked regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes
be examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from
night blindness - the inability to see in dim light - and
aren’t even aware of it. Rain and wet roads canmean driving trouble.On a wet
road, you can’t stop, accelerate or turn as well because
your tire-to-road traction isn’t as good as on dry roads.
And, if your tires don’t have much tread left, you’ll get
even less traction. It’s always wise to go slower and
be cautious if rain starts tofall while you are driving.
The surface may get wet suddenly when your reflexes
are tuned for driving on dry pavement.

4-18
 The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy
rain can make it harder to see road signs and traffic
signals, pavement markings, the edge of the road and
even people walking.
It’s wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washertank filled with washer
fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts when
they show signs of streaking or missing areas on the
windshield, or when strips of rubber start to separate
from the inserts.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even
going through some car washes can cause problems,
too. The water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid
puddles. But if you can’t, try to slow down before you
hit them.
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They won’t
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
4-19
Hydroplaning
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build up
under your tires that they can actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough and
you’re going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Hydroplaning doesn’t happen often. But it can if your
tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in one or
more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is standing
on the road. If you can see reflections from trees,
telephone poles or other vehicles, and raindrops
“dimple” the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.
There just isn’t a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Nofice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water thatis
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you can’t avoid deep puddles or standing
water, drive through them very slowly.
4-20
.-- Thr -W
~ Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you
~
might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carriedaway. As little as six inches of
flowing water can carry away a smaller
vehicle. Ifthis happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown.Don’t ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
9
Turn on your low-beam headlamps- not just your
parking lamps -to help make you more visible
to others.
e Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you pass
another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear room
ahead, and be prepared to have your view restricted
by road spray.
9
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-60.
City Driving Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would for a
cross-country trip.
0 Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You’ll save time and energy.
See the next part, “Freeway Driving.”
0 Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.

One of the biggest problems with city streets is the

--_I ~ n n
t g tvn#;n n m thnm Vnt t’ll I r r e n t tn t n t q t n h n t st f n v
U I I I V U I I L VI L I U I I I C I VI1 LIIGlll. I VU I # Y V U l I I L V Y V U L U I I VUt IVI

what the other drivers are doing and pay attention

to traffic signals.

4-2 1
Freeway Driving
Mile for mile, freeways (also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes or superhighways) are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
4-22
The most important advice on freeway driving is:
Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway as
you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect
to blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to the
posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it’s slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there isn’t another vehicle in
your “blind” spot.
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect to
move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the Here are some things you can check before a trip:
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit, e Windshield Washer Nuid: Is the reservior full?
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
Drive on to the next exit.
e Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted. e Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checkea
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer, not all levels?
to your sense of motion. After driving for any distance e Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
at higher speeds, you may tend to think you are e Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
going slower than you actually are.
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated
Before Leaving on a Long Trip to the recommended pressure?
e Weather Forecasts: What’s the weather outlook
Make sure you’re ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you’re not fresh - such as after a day’s along your route? Should you delay your trip a
work - don’t plan to make too many miles that first short time to avoid a major storm system?
part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing and shoes e Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
you can easily drive in.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it’s ready to go. If it needs
ser?l!ce, !?%.le It dene befere st2fiinCJ e$. Qf cwrse,
you’ll find experienced and able service experts in
dealerships all across North America. They’ll be ready
and willing to help if you need it.

4-23
Highway Hypnosis Hill and Mountain Roads
Is there actually such a condition as “highway hypnosis”?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Don’t let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle can
leave the road in less than a second, and you could
crash and be injured.
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Then here are some tips:
e Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with a
comfortably cool interior.
e Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead and
to the sides. Check your mirrors and your Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
instruments frequently. driving in flat or rolling terrain.
e If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.

4-24
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you’re
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable.
Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system
and transaxle. These parts can work hard on
mountain roads.
Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you go
down a steep or Ion- 5 1 1 .
If you don’t shift down, your brakes could get
so hot that they wouldn’t workwell. You would
then have poor braking or even none going
down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let
your engine assist your brakes ona steep
downhill slope.
Coast ...d downhill in NEUTRA- ,.,
or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they wouldn’t work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
0 Know how to go uphill. You may wantto shift down to
a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your engine
and transaxle, and you can climb the hill better.
e Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
roads inhills or mountains. Don’t swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds that let
you stay in your own lane.
- As you go over ihe iop oi a hiii, be aieri. There couia
be something in your lane, like a stalled car or an
accident.
You may see highway signs on mountains that warn
of special problems. Examples are long grades,
passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks area or
winding roads. Be alert to these and take appropriate
action.
4-25
Winter Driving Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth
and a couple of reflective warning triangles. And, if you
will be driving under severe conditions, include a
small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet or a couple of
burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure you
properly secure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or Ice

Most of the time, those places where your tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between your tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You’ll have a lot less traction or “grip” and will need to be
very careful.

Here are some tips for winter driving:

Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
You may want to put winter emergency supplies in
your vehicle.

4-26
 Whatever the condition - smooth ice, packed, blowing
or loose snow - drive with caution.
If you have traction control, keep the system on. It will
improve your ability to accelerate when driving on a
slippery road. But you can turn the traction system off
if you ever need to. You should turn the system off
if your vehicle ever gets stuck in sand, mud, ice,
or snow. See If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow on page 4-30. Even though your vehicle has
a traction system you’ll want to slow down and adjust
your driving to the road conditions. See Traction Control
System (TCS) on page 4- 10.
If you don’t have a traction system, accelerate gently.
Try not to break the gentle traction. If you accelerate
too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface
under the tires even more.
Unless you have the anti-lock braking system, you’ll
What’s the worst time for this? “Wet ice.” Very cold want to brake very gently, too. (If you do have anti-lock,
snow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet see Braking on page 4-6. This system improves your
ice can be even more trouble because it may offer vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
thn in-&
L l l b I L i U 3 L
t v n n t i n n n$ - 1 1
I I U b L i U I I VI (511.
V n v m n-m nnt * a , - +
I V U b C d 1 I YGL W Y G L I G G
:nn a a e h - n :+*a
VWI l t l I I1 3
slipperv road.) Whether you have the anti-lock braking
about freezing (32°F; OOC) and freezing rain begins system or not, you’ll want to begin stopping sooner than
to fall. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand you would on dry pavement. Without anti-lock brakes,
crews can get there. if you feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on the
brakes a little. Push the brake pedal down steadily to
get the most traction you can.

4-27
Remember, unless you have anti-lock, if you brake If You’re Caught in a Blizzard
so hard that your wheels stop rolling, you’ll just slide.
Brake so your wheels always keep rolling and you can
still steer.
0 Whatever your braking system, allow greater
following distance on any slippery road.
0 Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that’s covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear
in shaded areas where the sun can’t reach: around
clumps of trees, behind buildings or under bridges.
Sometimes the surface of a curve or an overpass
may remain icy when the surrounding roads
are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of you,
brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you’re actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.

If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in

a serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you
are near help and you can hike through the snow.

4-28
Here are some things to do to summon help and keep
yourself and your passengers safe:
e Turn on your hazard flashers.
Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you’ve been stopped by the snow.
e Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you have no blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags, rags,
floor mats - anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
. , . - . . .
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
Snow can trap exhaust gasesunr, your
vehicle. This can cause deadlyCO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside.CO could
overcome you and kill you. You can’t see it
or smell it, so you might not knowit is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any that
is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure
snow doesn’t collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that’s away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
4-29
Run your engine only as long as you must. This saves
fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a little
faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window almost
all the way to preserve the heat. Start the engine
again and repeat this only when you feel really
uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little as
possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or so until help comes.
4-30
If You Are Stuck: In Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you don’t want to spin your
wheels too fast. The method known as “rocking” can
help you get out when you’re stuck, but you must
use caution.
If you let your tires spin at high spe ~, rey
~ ~
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transaxle or other parts of
the vehicle can overheat. That could cause an
engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you’re stuck, spin the wheels as little as
possible. Don’t spin the wheels above35 mph
(55 km/h) as shown on the speedometer.
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts
of your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transaxle
back and forth, you can destroy your transaxle.
See “Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out.”
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
see Tire Chains on page 5-67.
Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That will
clear the area around your front wheels. If your vehicle
has traction control, you should turn your traction
control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-10. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. Release the accelerator pedal
while you shift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal
when the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinning your
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you
will cause a rocking motion that may free your vehicle.
If that doesn’t get you out after a few tries, you may
need to be towed out. If you do need to be towed out,
see “Towing Your Vehicle” following.
4-31
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 9-5.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see ”Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle - such as behind a motorhome.
The two most commontypes of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground and
two wheels up on adevice know as a “dolly”).
4-32
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to be
towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on
page 4-23.
Dinghy Towing
Your vehicle was not designed to be towed with all of its
wheels on the ground. If you have a two-wheel-drive
vehicle, it can be towed with two of its wheels on
the ground. See “Dolly Towing” following. If you have an
all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be towed with any of
its wheels on the ground. It can be towed with car carrier
equipment.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
Dolly Towing
If you have a two-wheel-drive vehicle, it can be towed
with two of its wheels on the ground. To dolly tow
your vehicle, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, it cannot be
towed with any of its wheels on the ground. It can be
towed with car carrier equipment.
Notice: Towing an all-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground,or even with only two of
its wheels on the ground, will damage drivetrain
components. Don’t tow an all-wheel-drive vehicle if
any of its wheels will be on the ground.
4-33
Loading Your Vehicle
The CertificationDire label is found on the rear edge of
the driver's door.
The label shows the size of your original tires and the
inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.
4-34
The Certificationflire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles,called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads
on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a
weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle or the GAWR
for e:'"er the front or rear axle.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR, or either the maximum front orrear
GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can
break, and it can change the way your vehicle
handles. These could cause you to lose
control and crash. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Notice: Your warranty does not cover parts or
components that fail becauseof overloading.
If you put things inside your vehicle - like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else - they will go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn
quickly, or if there is a crash, they'll keep going.
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash.
Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicleso that some of them
are above the topsof the seats.
Don't leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
0 When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
i3on.i ieave a seai ioiciea ciown uniess
you need to.
Automatic Level Control
On vehicles equipped with the automatic level control,
the rear of the vehicle is automatically kept level as you
load or unload your vehicle. However, you should still
not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR.
If the engine is running or the ignition key is in
ACCESSORY or whenRetained Accessory Power (RAP)
is active, you may hear the compressor operating when
you load or unload your vehicle, and periodically as the
system self-adjusts. This is normal. See "Retained
Accessory Power" underIgnition Positionson page 2-32.
The compressor should operate for brief periods of time.
If the sound continues for an extended period of
time, your vehicle needs service.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right away.
4-35
T o w i v a Trailer
= m m
If you don’t use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well-- or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the stepsin this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle. Additional rear axle maintenance
is required for a vehicle used to tow a trailer.
See “Scheduled Maintenance Services” in the Index.
4-36
Your vehicle can tow a trailer. To identify what the
vehicle trailering capacity is for your vehicle, you should
read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that
appears later in this section. But trailering is different
than just driving your vehicle by itself. Trailering means
changes in handling, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment
and it has to be used properly.
That’s the reason for this section. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and thatof
your passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine, transaxle,
wheel assemblies and tires are forced to work harder
against the drag of the added weight. The engine
is required to operate at relatively higher speeds and
under greater loads, generating extra heat. What’s more,
the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,
increasing the pulling requirements.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
e There are many different laws, including speed limit
restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure
your rig will be legal, not only where you live
but also where you’ll be driving. A good source for
this information can be state or provincial police.
e Consider using a sway control if your trailer will
weigh 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg) or less. You should
always use a sway control if your trailer will weigh
more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg). You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
e Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
e Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
e You can use THIRD (3) (or, as you need to, a lower
gear) when towing a trailer. Operating your vehicle
in THIRD (3) when towing a trailer will minimize
heat buildup and extend the life of your transaxle.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
the weight of the trailer,
* the weight of the trailer tongue
and the weight on your vehicle’s tires.
4-37
Weight of the Trailer Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be? The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
It should never weigh more than 1,400 Ibs. (630 kg) with to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
up to six occupants or more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg) of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
with up to two occupants. If you have the optional trailer includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
towing package, your vehicle can tow up to 2,900 Ibs. may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
(1 300 kg) with up to six occupants or up to 3,500 Ibs. the vehicle. And if you will tow a trailer, you must add
(1 575 kg) with up to two occupants. But even that the tongue load to the GVW because your vehicle will be
can be too heavy. carrying that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle
It depends on how youplan to use your rig. Forexample, on page 4-34 for more information about your vehicle’s
speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and maximum load capacity.
how much yourvehicle is usedto pull a trailer are all
important. And, it can also depend on any special
equipment that you have on your vehicle.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information or
advice, or you can write us at:
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5171
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005 A B
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

4-38
If you’re using a weight-carrying or a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue weight(A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle.
After you’veloaded your trailer,weigh the trailer and then
the tongue, separately, tosee if the weights are proper.
If they aren’t, you may be
able to get them right simply by
moving some items around in the trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on
the Certification/Tire Label at the rear edge of the
driver’s door, or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-34
Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW limit for
your vehicle, including the weight of the trailer tongue.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you’ll need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
The bumpers on your vehicle are not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to them. Use only a
frame-mounted hitch that does not attach to
the bumper.
If you’ll be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 2,000 Ibs. (900 kg). be sure to
use a properly mounted, weight-carrying hitch and
sway control of the proper size. This equipment
is very important for proper vehicle loading
and good handling when you’re driving.
Will you have to make any holes in the body of
your vehicle when you install a trailer hitch?
If you do, then be sure to seal the holes later when
y x ! re!-!-!nve !!-!e hitch. !f \’E!den'? sn2! !!?%??,
deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your exhaust
can get into your vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page 2-43. Dirt and water can, too.
4-39
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the
tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from
contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be
provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the
trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. Never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
If your trailer weighs more than 1,000 Ibs. (450 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes - and they must be
adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install,
adjust and maintain them properly.
Because your vehicle may have anti-lock brakes, do not
try to tap into your vehicle’s brake system. If you do,
both brake systems won’t work well, or at all.
4-40
Driving with a Trailer
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You can’t see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See “Engine
Exhaust” in the Index. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
Have your exhaust system inspected for
leaks, and make necessary repairs before
starting on your trip.
Keep the rear-most windows closed.
If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with the
fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the comfort control setting for maximum
air because it only recirculates the air
inside your vehicle.See ‘“Comfort
Controls” in the Index.
 rowing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check the trailer hitch and platform
(and attachments), safety chains, electrical connector,
lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has
electric brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and
then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be
sure the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, checkoccasionally to be sure that the
load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Passing
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good deal
longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond the
passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Making Turns
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you’returning with a trailer, make wider turns than
normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike soft shoulders;
curbs, road signs, trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or
sudden maneuvers. Signal well in advance.
4-41
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle has to have
extra wiring.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer
are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers behind
you are seeing your signal when they are not. It’s
important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer
bulbs are still working.
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you start
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much that
they would get hot and no longer work well.
If you are towing a trailer that weighs more than
1,000 Ibs. (450 kg), you may prefer to drive in THIRD (3)
instead of AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) (or, as you
need to, a lower gear). This will minimize heat build-up
and extend the life of your transaxle.
4-42
Parking on Hills
I
You really should not park your vehicle, u....~ a
trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,
here’s how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2, Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake, and then shift to PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave After Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Parking on a Hill Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal down pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
while you: on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill),
start your engine, engine oil, belts, cooling system and brake system.
* shift into a gear, and Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
* release the parking brake. it’s a good idea to review these sections before you
2. Let up on the brake pedal. start your trip.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the
chocks. Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle has a trailer wiring harness located at the
rear of your vehicle. To use the trailer wiring harness
you need a converter kit. Contact your dealer for more
information.

4-43
4
P
P
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

Service ............................................................ 5.3 Battery ........................................................ 5.43

Doing Your Own Service Work ......................... 5.3 Jump Starting ............................................... 5-44
Adding Equipment to the Outside of All-Wheel Drive .............................................. 5-50
Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Bulb Replacement .......................................... 5-52
Fuel .............................................................. - 5 - 5 Halogen Bulbs .............................. .........5-52
Gasoline Octane ............................................ 5-5 Headlamps ...................................... .....5-52
Gasoline Specifications ................................... 5 - 5 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
California Fuel ............................................... 5-6 Parking Lamps .............................. .....5-54
Additives ....................... .... .........5-6 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Fuels in Foreign Countries ........... .....5-7 Back-up Lamps ......................................... 5-56
Filling
YourTank ............................ .....5-7 Replacement Bulbs ....................................... 5-57
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-9
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-58
Checking Things Under the Hood ..................- 5 - 10
Hood Release .............................................. 5-10 Tires .............................................................. 5-60
Engine Compartment Overview ....................... 5-12 Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................ 5-61
Engine Oil ................................................... 5-14 Tire Inspection and Rotation ........................... 5-62
Engine Air CleanedFilter ................................ 5-19 When It Is Time for New Tires ....................... 5-63
Automatic Transaxle Fluid .............................. 5-20 Buying New Tires ......................................... 5-64
r.--.:.--
CI lyll IC uuvlal I1 .............................................
---I-.- b c r)r)
4-LU
Uniform Tire Quality Grading .......................... 5-65
Radiator Pressure Cap ............................... 5-26 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-66
Engine Overheating .................................... 5-26 Wheel Replacement ...................................... 5-66
Cooling System ............................. , .......5-29 Tire Chains .................................................. 5-67
Power Steering Fluid .................. , .......5-37 Accessory Inflator ......................................... 5-68
WindshieldWasher Fluid ................. , .......5-38 If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................ 5-69
Brakes .......................... .... ........5-39 Changing a Flat Tire ..................................... 5-70
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 5-86

5- 1
 Section 5 Service and Appearance Care
Appearance Care ............................................ 5.87
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-87
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-90
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-90
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .................5-90
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5.92
Finish Damage ............................................. 5.92
Underbody Maintenance ................................ 5.93
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5.93
GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ...........5.93
5-2
Vehicle Identification ........................ ......5.95
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ... ......5.95
Service Parts Identification Label ... ......5.95
Electrical System .......................... ..........5.96
Add-on Electrical Equipment ...................... 5.96
Headlamp Wiring .......................................... 5.96
Windshield Wiper Fuses ................................ 5.96
Power Windows and Other Power Options .......5.96
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ............................ 5.96
Capacities and Specifications ........................ 5.103
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts .........5.105
Service
Your dealer knows yourvehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you’ll go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You’ll get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
We hope you’ll want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
Doing Your Own Service Work
If you want to do some of your own service work, you’ll
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you
much more about how to service your vehicle than this
manual can. To order the proper service manual,
see Service Publications Ordering Information on
page 7-10.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Air
Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-76.
5-3
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list Adding Equipment to the Outside of
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Part E: Maintenance Record on page 6-18. Your Vehicle
-.- IThings you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
You can be injured and your vehicle could be the outside of your vehicle.
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts and
other fasteners. “English” and “metric”
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.

5-4

Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of
the proper maintenance of your vehicle.
Gasoline Octane
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
of 87 or higher. If the octane is less than 87, you may
get a heavy knocking noise when you drive. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. Otherwise, you might damage
your engine. A little pinging noise when you accelerate
or drive uphill is considered normal. This does not
indicate a problem exists or that a higher-octane fuel is
necessary. If you are using 87 octane or higher-octane
fuel and hear heavy knocking, your engine needs
service.
Gasoline Specifications
It is recommended that gasoline meet specifications
which were developed by the American Automobile
Manufacturers Association and endorsed by the
Canadian Vehicle Manufacturers Association for better
vehicle performance and engine protection. Gasoline
meeting these specifications could provide improved
driveability and emission control system performance
compared to other gasoline.
In Canada, look for the
“Auto Makers’ Choice”
label on the pump.
Canada Only
5-5
California Fuel
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emission
Standards (see the underhood emission control label),
it is designed to operate on fuels that meet California
specifications. If this fuel is not available in states
adopting California emissions standards, your vehicle
will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal
specifications, but emission control system performance
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may
turn on (see Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-47 )
and your vehicle may fail a smog-check test. If this
occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer for
diagnosis. If it is determined that the condition is caused
by the type of fuel used, repairs may not be covered
by your warranty.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that will help
prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming,
allowing your emission control system to work properly.
You should not haveto add anything to your fuel.
5-6
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines maybe available in
your area to contribute to clean air. General Motors
recommends that you use these gasolines, particularly
if they complywith the specificationsdescribed earlier.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Don’t use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage wouldn’t be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors does
not recommend the use of such gasolines. Fuels
containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs and
the performance of the emission control system may
be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp may turn on.
If this occurs, return to your authorized GM dealer
for service.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel wouldn’t be
covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in the
country where you’ll be driving.

Filling Your Tank

The fuel door is located on the driver’s side of the

Fue. -.,~r i- .lighly flammable. It burns
. vehicle.
violently, and that can cause very bad injuries.
When the fuel door is opened on a vehicle with dual
Don3 smoke ii you‘re near iuei or reiueiing
sliding doors, the driver’s side sliding door will only
your vehicle. Keep sparks, flames and smoking
open partway.
materials away from fuel.

5-7
 m

If you get fuel on yourself and then something

ignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuel can
spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too
quickly. This spray can happen if your tank is
nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather.
Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any
“hiss” noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap
all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Clean fuel from painted

surfaces as soon as possible. See Cleaning the Outside
1 of Your Vehicle on page 5-90.

While refueling, let the fuel cap hang by the tether

as shown.

5-8
When you put the fuel cap back on, turn it to the right
(clockwise) until you hear a clicking sound. Make
sure you fully install the cap. The diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
page 3-47.
The malfunction indicator lamp (SERVICE ENGINE
SOON or CHECK ENGINE light) will come on if the
fuel cap is not properly installed.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you.
If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly.
This may cause your malfunction indicator lamp to
light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions
system. See “Malfunction Indicator Lamp” in the
Index.
Filling a Po -able Fuel C ‘ainer
I-
I fil portablc
uel while it is in
container
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury
to you and others:
Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed or
on any surface other than the ground.
Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
0 Don’t smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-9
Checking Things Under Hood Release
the Hood To open the hood, do the following:

I
A'CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electricfan.
1
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, 1. Pull the hood release handle, located on the
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and driver's side under the instrument panel.
other fluids, and plastic or rubber.You or 2. Go to the front of the vehicle and push up on the
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop underhood release, located near the center under
or spill things thatwill burn onto a hot engine. the grille.
L

5-10
3. Lift the hood.
4. Pull forward on the hood prop to release it from its
storage clip.
The hood prop may be hot due to increased engine
temperatures under the hood, so be careful when
handling it. Use your hood prop sleeve when
handling the hood prop.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then follow these steps:
1. Lift the hood to relieve pressure on the hood prop.
2. Remove the hood prop from the slot in the hood.
3. Return the prop to its retainer.
4. Let the hood down and close it firmly.

Put the end of the

hood prop into the slot
in the underside of
the hood.

5-1 1
Engine Compartment Overview
When you lift the hood, you’ll see these items:

5-12
A. Underhood Fuse Block
B. Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir
D. Radiator Pressure Cap
E. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap
G. Engine Oil Dipstick
H. Transaxle Fluid Dipstick
I . Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir
J. Engine Air CleanedFilter
K. Engine Coolant Reservoir
5-13
Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil
It’s a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
LOW must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
ENG OIL The engine oil dipstick is
LEVEL located at the front of the
engine compartment,
near the center. The
United States Canada dipstick handle has a
bright, yellow loop design
If the low engine oil level message appears on the for easy identification.
instrument cluster, it means you need to check your See Engine Compartment
engine oil level right away. For more information, Overview on page5- 12
see Low Engine Oil Level Message on page 3-55. for more information
on location.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.

Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to
drain back into the oil pan. If you don’t, the oil
dipstick might not show the actual level.
Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it again,
keeping the tip down, and check the level.

5-14
 Notice: Don’t add too much oil. If your engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, your engine could be damaged.

The engine oil fill cap is

located behind the engine
A
oil dipstick. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5- 72 for more
I information on location.
SAE 5W-30
L a
When to Add Engine Oil
I L

Be sure to fill it enough to put the level somewhere in the

If the oilis at or below thecross-hatched area at the tip 01
proper operating range in the cross-hatched area. Push
the dipstick, then you’llneed to add at least one quart of
the dipstick all the way backin when you’re through.
oil. But you must use the right kind. This part explains
what kind of oil to use. Forengine oil crankcase capacity.
~~~ 5- ;y .
CapciciiiesdjiU8r-pec;ficcif;GiisUii p ~ y e

5-15
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY GRADE ENGINE OILS
Oils recommended for your vehicle can be identified by
looking for the starburst symbol.
This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by
the American Petroleum Institute (API). Do not use
any oil which does not carry this starburst symbol. HOT
WEATHER
If you choose to perform
the engine oil change
service yourself, be sure
the oil you use has the
starburst symbol on the
front of the oil container.
If you have your oil
changed for you, be sure
the oil put into your engine
is American Petroleum
Institute certified for
gasoline engines.

You should also use the proper viscosity oil for your
vehicle, as shown in the viscosity chart.
~~

COLD
WEATHER
DO NOT USE SAE1OW-40, SAE 2OW-50 OR ANY OTHER
VISCOSITY GRADE OIL NOT RECOMMENDED

5-16
As in the chart shown previously, SAE 5W-30 is the
only viscosity grade recommended for your vehicle.
You should look for and use only oils which have the
API Starburst symbol and which are also identified
as SAE 5W-30. If you cannot find such SAE 5W-30 oils,
you can use an SAE 1OW-30 oil which has the
API Starburst symbol, if it's going to be 0°F (-18°C)
or above. Do not use other viscosity grade oils, such as
SAE 1OW-40 or SAE 20W-50 under any conditions.
Notice: Use only engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench@oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below -20°F (-29"C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE OW-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your engine
at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Don't add anything to your oil. The recommended oils
with the starburst symbol are all you will need for
good pe;formance and engifie prs:ection.
When to Change Engine Oil
(GM Oil Life System)
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and
not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has
been diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil message will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for
over a year. However, your engine oil and filter must
be changed at least once a year and at this time
the system must be reset. It is also important to check
. .- . ..- - : I . I - ..I.IY. a
-1 I----
-1-IU ncep :r - I rl- - .- .- - ._ eve^.
I-. , - I
yuul UII I cyular e IJI upcl
1 1 a 1 11l
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
5-17
How to Reset the Change Engine
Oil Message
The GM Oil Life System calculates when to change your
engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime your
oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when
the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where
you changeyour oil prior to a changeengine oil message
being turned on, reset the system.
1. With the ignition key in RUN but the engine off,
repeatedly push the tripheset button until OIL is
displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC).
2. Once OIL is displayed, push and hold the tripheset
button for five seconds. The number will disappear
and be replaced by 100 (indicating 100% oil life
remaining).
3. Turn the key to OFF.
If the change engine oil message comes back on,
the engine oil life monitor has not reset. Repeat the
procedure.
5-18
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Don’t let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it
by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you
have a problem properly disposing of your used oil,
ask your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
Engine Air CleanedFilter 3. Unlatch the two hooks on top of the engine air
cleaner/filter housing.
The engine air cleaner/filter
is located at the front of the 4. Remove and replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
engine compartment,on the driver’s side of the vehicle,
under the engine coolantreservoir. See Engine 5. Align the tabs located on the bottom of the
Compartment Overviewon page 5- 72for more panel with the slots at the bottom of the housing.
information on location. 6. Latch the hooks to secure the panel in place. If the
panel moves easily, check that the tabs are seated
Checking or Replacing the Engine correctly in the slots.
Air Cleaner/Filter 7. Put the duct back on and reinstall the clamps.

Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter

off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air, it stops
flame if the engine backfires.If it isn’t there
and the engine backfires, you could be burned.
Don’t drive with it off, and be careful working
on the engine with theair cleaner/filter off.
I

Notice: If the air cleanedfilter is off, a backfire

can cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt
can easily get into your engine, which will
1. Remove the two clamps on the duct. damage it. Always have the air cleanedfilter in
2. Remove the duct. place when you’re driving.

5-19
Automatic Transaxle Fluid
When to Check and Change
A good time to check your automatic transaxle fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change both the fluid and filter every 50,000 miles
(83 000 km) if the vehicle is mainly driven under one or
more of these conditions:
In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
In hilly or mountainous terrain.
When doing frequent trailer towing.
Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of
these conditions, change the fluid and filter at
100,000 miles (166 000 km).
See Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services
on page 6-4.
5-20
How to Check
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your
transaxle. Too much can mean that some of the fluid
could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust
system parts, starting a fire.Too little fluid could
cause the transaxle to overheat. Be sureto get an
accurate reading if you check your transaxle fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transaxle
fluid level if you have been driving:
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic - especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it's colder than 50°F (1OOC), you may have to
drive longer.
Checking the Fluid Level rhen, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
e Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the engine
running.
With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
e With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position the shift
lever in PARK (P).
e Let the engine run at idle for three to five minutes.

The dipstick is located toward the back of the engine

compartment, next to the brake master cylinder reservoir
The dipstick has a bright, red loop design for easy
identification. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5- 12 ior more information on iocation.
1. Pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag
or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and
then pull it back out again.

5-2 1

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the
lower level. The fluid level must be in the
cross-hatched area.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
How to Add Fluid
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transaxle fluid to use. See Pat? D:
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level into the cross-hatched area on
the dipstick.
5-22
1. Pull out the dipstick.
2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid at
the dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.
It doesn’t take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Don’t overfill.
Notice: We recommend you use only fluid labeled
DEXRON@-Ill, because fluid with that label is
made especially for your automatic transaxle.
Damage caused by fluid other than DEXRON@-Ill is
not covered by your new vehicle warranty.
3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check.”
4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way.
Engine Coolant Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use only DEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with If coolant other than DEX-COOL@is added to
DEX-COOL@ engine coolant.This coolant is designed the system, premature engine, heater core or
to remain in your vehicle for 5 years or 150,000 miles radiator corrosion may result. In addition, the engine
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add --
coolant will require change soonerat 30,000 miles
only DEX-COOL@ extendedlife coolant. (50,000 km) or 24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
The following explains your cooling system and how to
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
vehicle warranty.
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating on
page 5-26.
A 5 0 6 0 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL@coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to -34°F (-37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
0 Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning messages and gages work as they
should.

5-23
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL@coolant which won’t damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture,
you don’t need to add anything else.
Adding on , plain wa * to your cooling
~ ~
system can be dangerous. Plainwater, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will.Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL@coolant.
5-24
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat andbe badly damaged.
The repair cost wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture canfreeze
and crack theengine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use the proper coolant, you don’t
have to add extra inhibitors or additives which claim
to improve the system.These can be harmful.
Checking Coolant
The engine coolant
reservoir is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle,
above the engine air
cleanedfilter. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page5- 12for more
information on location.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your Add coolant mixture at the recovery tank, but be careful
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the FULL not to spill it.
COLD mark, or a little higher. When your engine is
warm, the level should be above the FULL COLD mark
or a little higher.
Adding Coolant
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL@ engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
coolant mixture at the coolant recovery tank.
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant on ahot engine.
.
Occasionally check the coolant level in the radiator.
Turning the radiator pressure cap when the For information on how to add coolant to the radiator,
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam see Cooling System on page 5-29.
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn
you badly. With the coolant recovery tank,
you will almost never have to add coolantat
the radiator. Never turn the radiator pressure
cap - even a little- when the engine and
radister Ere h3!.

5-25
Radiator Pressure Cap
Notice: Your radiator cap is a pressure-type cap
and must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss
and possible engine damage from overheating.
Be sure the arrows on the cap line up with the
overflow tube on the radiator filler neck.
The radiator pressure cap is located at the front of the
engine compartment on the passenger’s side of the
vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-72for more information on location.
Engine Overheating
You will find an engine coolant temperature gage on
your vehicle’s instrument panel cluster. See Engine
Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-47. You also
have an engine coolant temperature warning message
on your instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning Message on page 3-53.
5-26
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
This emergency operating mode allows your vehicleto
be driven to a safe place in an emergency situation.
If an overheated engine condition exists, an overheat
protection mode which alternates firing groups of
cylinders helps prevent engine damage. In this mode,
you will notice a significant loss in power and engine
performance. The temperature gage will indicate
an overheat condition exists. Driving extended miles
(km) and/or towing a trailer in the overheat protection
mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid enginedamage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the causeof coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See “Engine Oil” in
the Index.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

Steam fr n a rheated engine 4 urn

you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming fromit. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicleuntil it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engineis cool.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.

Notice: If your engine catches fire because you keep

driving with no coolant, your vehicle can be badly
damaged. The costly repairs would not be covered by
your warranty.See “Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode” in the Index for information
on
driving to a safe place in an emergency.

5-27
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stopafter high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If your air conditioner is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the window as necessary.
3. If you’re in a traffic jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N);
otherwise, shift to the highest gear while
driving - AUTOMATIC OVERDRIVE (D) or
THIRD (3).
5-28
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning doesn’t come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there’s still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you’re parked. If you still have the
warning, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated
Engine Protection Operating Mode” listed previously in
this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
Cooling System
When you decide it’s safe to lift the hood, here’s what
you’ll see:
An electric engine cooling far. -..-er the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank is boiling,

don’t do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.

A. Radiator Pressure Cap

B. Electric Engine Cooling Fans
C. Coolant Recovery Tank

5-29

The coolant level should be at or above the FULL COLD
mark. If it isn’t, you may have aleak at the pressure cap
or in the radiator hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhereelse in thecooling system.
5-30
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Don’t touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Don’t run the engine if there is a leak. If you run
the engine,it could lose all coolant. That could
cause an enginefire, and you couldbe burned.
Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fans are running.
If the engine is overheating, both fans should be
running. If they aren’t, your vehicle needs service.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant isn’t covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to
a safe place in an emergency.
Notice: When adding coolant, it is important that
you use onlyDEX-COOL@(silicate-free) coolant.
If coolant other thanDEX-COOL@is added to the
system, premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion may result. In addition, the engine coolant
will require change sooner- at 30,000 miles
(50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first.
Damage caused by the use of coolant other
than DEX-COOL@is not covered by your new
vehicle warranty.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Recovery Tank
If you haven’t found a problem yet, but the coolant
level isn’t at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable waterand DEX-COOL@
engine coolant at the coolant recovery tank. See Engine
Coolant on page5-23for more information.
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you wouldn’t get the overheat warning.
V n ~ l re n ~ i n e
mt1ld catch fire and YOU o r others
could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX COOL@coolant.
5-31
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
You can be burned if youspill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts
are hot
enough. Don’t spill coolant ona hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank is at or

above the FULL COLD mark, start your vehicle.
If the overheat warning continues, there’s one more
thing you can try. You can add the proper coolant
mixture directly to the radiator, but be sure the cooling
system is cool before you do it.

5-32
Steam and scaldi,,, liquids ,.dm a hot cooli..,
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the radiator
-- --
pressure cap even a little they can come
out at high speed. Never turn the cap when the
cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap, is hot. Wait for the cooling system and
radiator pressure cap to cool if you ever have
to turn the pressurecap.

5-33
How to Add Coolant to the Radiator If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss
means there is still some pressure left.
Notice: Your engine hasa specific radiatorfill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but now push

down as you turn it. Remove the pressure cap.

1. You can remove the radiator pressure cap when

the cooling system, including the radiator pressure
cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise until
it first stops. (Don’t press down while turning the
pressure cap.)

5-34
 You can -_burned if you sc-.. coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Don't spill coolant on a hot engine.

4. Fill the radiator with the proper DEX-COOL@

coolant mixture, up to the base of the filler
neck. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for more
information about the proper coolant mixture.
If you see a stream of coolant coming from an
air bleed valve, close the valve. Otherwise,
ciose tne vaives aiier ine radiaior is iiiiea.
5. Rinse or wipe any spilled coolant from the engine
3. After the engine cools, open the coolant air bleed
and the compartment.
valves.
There are two bleed valves. One is located on the
thermostat housing. The other is located OR the
thermostat bypass tube.

5-35
6 . Start the engine and let it run until you can feel the 8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any time during
upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the this procedure if coolant begins to flow out of the
engine cooling fans. filler neck, reinstall the pressure cap. Be sure
the arrows on the pressure cap line up with the
7. By this time, the coolant level inside the radiator
vent tube.
filler neck may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL@coolant mixture
through the filler neck until the level reaches
the base of the filler neck.

5-36
 Power Steering Fluid

9. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to the FULL

COLD mark.
10. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank. The power steering fluid reservoir is located to the right
of the windshield washer fluid reservoir, at the back
of the engine compartment.

5-37
When to Check Power Steering Fluid Windshield Washer Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or What to Use
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to read
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you will
and repaired. See Engine Compartment Overview be operating your vehicle in an area where the
on page 5-72 for reservoir location. temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing. See Engine
How to Check Power Steering Fluid Compartment Overview on page5-12 for reservoir
Turn the key off , let the engine compartment cool down, location.
wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean,then
unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. Adding Washer Fluid
Replace the cap and completely tighten it. Then remove
the cap again and look at the fluid level on the dipstick. Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
When the engine compartment is hot, the level should Add washer fluid until
be at the H (hot) mark. When it’s cold, the level the tank is full.
should be at the C (cold) mark. If the fluid is at the
ADD mark, you should add fluid.
What to Use
. --

To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Part D:

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16. P A
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.

5-38
Noiice: Brakes
a When using concentrated washer fluid, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water. Brake Fluid
Don’t mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause thesolution tofreeze and
damage your washerfluid tank and other parts of
the washer system.Also, water doesn’t clean as
well as washer fluid.
a Fill yourwasher fluid tank only three-quarters full
when it’s very cold. This allows for expansion
if
freezing occurs, which could damage the tank if
it is completely full.
a in your
Don’t use engine coolant (antifreeze)
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system andpaint.

Your brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT-3

brake fluid. See Engine Compatfment Overview on
n3np
r - 5-12 fnr the Incatinn n f the resewnir~
--a

5-39
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
BRAKE
leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should have
your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes won’t work well, or won’t
work at all.
When your brake fluid falls to a low level, your brake
So, it isn’t a good idea to “top off your brake fluid. warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning
Adding brake fluid won’t correct a leak. If you add fluid Light on page 3-44.
when your linings are worn, then you’ll have too much
fluid when you get new brake linings. You should add What to Add
(or remove) brake fluid, as necessary, only when work
is done on the brake hydraulic system. When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6- 16.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
1. ,’-have too much brake f L J , it can spi.. an area around the cap before removing it. This will help
the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine is keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.

5-40

\ h the wrong kind of fluid in ur brake
system, your brakes may not workwell, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system
parts so badly that they’ll have to be replaced.
Don’t let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
0 If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
See “Appearance Care” in the Index.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has front disc brakes andrear drum brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make
a high-pitchedwarning sound whenthe brake pads are
worn and new pads are needed. Thesound may come
and go or be heard all the time your vehicle ismoving
(except when you are pushing on the brake pedalfirmly).
The brakewear warning sound means that soon
your brakes won’t work to
well. That could lead
an accident. When youhear the brake wear
warning sound, have your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly
applied. This does not mean something is wrong with
your brakes.
5-41
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Your rear drum brakes don’t have wear indicators, but if
you ever hear a rear brake rubbing noise, have the
rear brake linings inspected immediately. Also, the rear
brake drums should be removed and inspected each
time the tires are removed for rotation or changing.
When you have the front brake pads replaced, have the
rear brakes inspected, too.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
See Brake System Inspection on page 6-15.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return to
normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in
pedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, your brakes adjust for wear.
5-42
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicleis complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well togetherif
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-qualityGM brake parts.
When you replace parts of your braking system-for
example, whenyour brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in - be sure you get new approved
GM replacement parts. If you don’t, your brakes may no
longer work properly. For example,if someone putsin
brake linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between your front and rear brakes can change-for the
worse. The braking performance you’ve cometo expect
can change in many other waysif someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your new vehicle comes with a maintenance free
ACDelco@battery. When it’s time for a new battery,
get one that has the replacement number shown on the
original battery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco@
battery. See Engine Comparfment Overview on
page 5-72 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you’re not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (-) cable from the
battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas
that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you
aren’t careful. See “Jump Starting” next for
tips on working around a battery without
getting hurt.
Contact your dealer to learn how to prepare your
vehicle for longer storage periods.
Also, for your audio system, see Theft-Deterrent
Feature on page 3- IO 1.
5-43
Jump Starting
If your battery has run down, you may want to use
another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your
vehicle. Be sure to follow the steps below to do it safely.
On vehicles equipped with the optional power sliding
door, a low-voltage battery or replacing a battery may
cause the system to become inoperative. See Power
Sliding Door (PSD) on paae2-76for more information.
Batteries can -.rt you. The, :an
.. 5 d-.. .gerous
._
because:
They contain acid that can burn you.
They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you don’t follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-44
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that wouldn’t be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling
it
won’t work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other system isn’t a 12-volt system
with a negative ground, both vehicles can be
damaged.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you don’t want. You wouldn’t be able to
start your vehicle, and the bad grounding could
damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put an automatic
transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual transaxle in
NEUTRAL before setting the parking brake.
Notice: If you leave your radio on, it could be badly The terminal is located
damaged. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by under atethered cap at
your warranty. the front of the underhood
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug fuse block. See Engine
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette Compartment Overview
lighter or in the accessory power outlet. Turn off on page5-12for more
the radio and all lamps that aren’t needed. This will information on location.
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save your radio!
4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Find the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminal locations on
each vehicle.
You will not need to access your battery for jump
starting. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) Squeeze the tabs and pull up on the cap to access
jump starting terminal for that purpose. the remote positive (+) terminal. You should always
use the remote positive (+) terminal instead of the
positive (+) terminal on your battery.

An electric fan can start up ever!hen the

engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any
underhood electric fan.

5-45

Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You
5. Check that the jumper cables don’t have loose or
don’t needto add waterto theACDelco@battery
installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery
has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid
is there. If it is low, add waterto take care of
that first. If you don’t, explosive gas could be
present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Don’t getit on you. If you accidentally get
it in
your eyes or on your skin,flush the place with
water and get medical help immediately.
5-46
--
1
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged, too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go to
positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal if
the vehicle has one. Negative (-) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (-) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Don’t connect positive (+) to negative (-) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery and
maybe other parts, too. And don’t connect the
negative (-) cable to the negative (-) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) 8. Now connect the black
terminal of the dead battery. Use a remote negative (-) cable
positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. to the negative (-)
terminal of the good
7. Don’t let the other end battery. Use a remote
touch metal. Connect it negative (-) terminal
to the positive (+) if the vehicle has one.
terminal of the good
battery. Use a remote
positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one.

Don’t let the other end touch anything until the

next step. The other end of the negative (-) cable
doesn’t go to the dead battery. It goes to a
heavy, unpainted metal part, or to a remote
negative (-) terminal on the vehicle with the
dead battery.

5-47
 9. Connect the other end 10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run
of the negative (-) the engine for a while.
cable at least 18 inches 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
(45 cm) away from If it won’t start after a few tries, it probably needs
the dead battery, service.
but not near engine
parts that move. Notice: Damage to your vehicle may result from
electrical shorting if jumper cables are removed
incorrectly. To prevent electrical shorting, take care
that the cables don’t touch each other or any
other metal. The repairs wouldn’t be covered by
your warranty.

The electrical connection is just as good there, and

the chance of sparks getting back to the battery
is much less.

5-48
 To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles,
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.

P
2. Disconnect the black negative (-) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.

d
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other
a vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover to its
original position.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part

B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal

5-49
All-Wheel Drive How to Check Lubricant
If you have an all-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure to
perform the lubricant checks described in this section.
However, they have two additional systems that
need lubrication.
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit)
When to Check Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant. See Part C: Periodic
Maintenance Inspections on page 6- 14.

To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a

level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.

5-50
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module)
When to Check and Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how
often to check the lubricant and when to change it. See
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 6-4.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a
level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
A fluid loss could indicate a problem; check and have it
repaired, if needed.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16.
5-51
Bulb Replacement Headlamps
For the type of bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on 1. Open the hood.
page 5-57. 2. Remove the front turn signaVparking lamp
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this assembly. See Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
section, contact your dealer. Parking Lamps on page 5-54.
3. Pull the assembly away from the vehicle.
Halogen Bulbs

Ha.,Jen ,Jibs h, - e pressurized ga, .nside and

can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or
others could be injured. Be sure to read and
follow the instructions on the bulb package.

4. Unscrew the black retainer ring that holds the bulb

assembly in place.

5-52
5.

6.

8. Carefully put the bulb assembly back into the lamp

housing. Be careful not to damage the bulb on the
headlamp aiming bar.

7. Install the new bulbthrough the black retainer ring

:-+e. + L e -l--+";--l -n----rL-.r l-:-I-rL-.- .LL- i-l--l-
a1 tu 11 i1u LI IC C i t b L I ibal but 11 ~ t b I 191
tu~ . lief I uidbk
11~t:

retainer ring in place. Push the bulb firmly enough

so that the blue tabs hook over the tab on the bulb.

5-53
 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Parking Lamps
1. Open the hood.

9. Align the pins on the bottom of the headlamp

assembly with the holes in the lamp support
bracket.
10. To reinstall the front turn signaVparking lamp
assembly. See Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker
and Parking Lamps on page 5-54 next. 2. Remove the thumbscrew attaching the front turn
signaVparking lamp assembly to the headlamp
assembly.

5-54
3. Pull the front turn signaVparking lamp assembly
away from the vehicle.

Front Sidemarker Lamp

4. Unscrew the bulb socket from the lamp assembly

Front Turn SignaVParking Lamp by pressing the tab while turning it
counterclockwise.
5 . Replace the bulb by pulling the old one out and
gently pushing the new one into the lamp socket.
6. Line up the tabs on the socket with the gaps in the
socket holes and screw the bulb socket back into
the lamp housing until a click is heard (the tab
popping back out).

5-55
 Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp housing
on the inboard side.
3. Pull off the entire taillamp housing.
The locator/retaining pins on the outboard side are
part of the lamp assembly and will remain intact
during removal.

7. To reinstall the lamp assembly, line up and insert

the tabs on the back of the assembly in the slots in
the fender. Engage the lower clip on the back of
the lamp assembly into the fender, keeping
the upper tab on the front turn signaVparking lamp
assembly inboard of the headlamp bracket tab.
8. To align the front turn SignaVparking lamp assembly
with the headlamp assembly, lift up the front turn
signaVparking lamp assembly until the upper edge is
contacting the fender.
9. Fasten the front turn signaVparking lamp assembly
to the headlamp assembly with the thumbscrew 4. Remove the bulb holder by pressing the four
removed in Step 2. retaining tabs and pulling the holder away from
the assembly.
5-56
 Replacement Bulbs
For any bulb not listed here contact your dealer.

I Lamp I Bulb Number I

I Back-ur,
Lamps (3rd from Tor,) I 3156 I
I Front Sidemarker
Lamps I 194 I
Front Turn SignaVParking Lamps 4157 NAK
Headlamps 9004-HBI

I Turn Signal Lamps

(2nd from Top) I 3156

A. Taillamp Bulb C. Turn Signal

6. Back-up Lamp Bulb Lamp Bulb
D. StopTTailIamp Bulb
5. Replace the bulb by pulling the old bulb out and
gently pushing the new bulb into the bulb holder
socket.
6. Snap the bulb holder backinto place, making sure all
retaining tabs areproperly over the bulb holder tabs.
7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly by inserting the
outboard locatingh-etainingpins until the lamp is
seated. Secure with the inboard screws.

5-57
Windshield Wiper Blade To remove the windshield wiper blade(s):
1. Turn the wipers on to the lowest intermittent setting.
Replacement 2. Turn the ignition to OFF while the wipers are at
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected at least the outer position of the wipe pattern.
twice a year for wear orcracking. See “Wiper Blade 3. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from the
Check in At Least Twice a Year on page 6-10 for windshield or backglass.
more information.
4. While holding the
Replacement blades come in different types and are wiper arm away from
removed in different ways. For proper type and length, the glass, push
see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts on the release clip from
page 5-105. under the blade.

5-58
5. Push the release clip at the connecting point of the
blade and the arm up. Then pull the blade assembly
down toward the glass to remove it from the
wiper arm.
6. Push the new wiper blade securely on thewiper arm
until you hear the release clip “click” into place.
7. Push the release clip, from Step 4, down to secure
the wiper blade into place.

5-59
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
0 Underinflated tires pose the same danger
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your Oldsmobile Warranty booklet for details.
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and a
serious accident. See “Loading Your
Vehicle” in the Index.
CAUTION: (Continued]
5-60
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold.
Overinflated tires are more likely to be
cut, punctured or broken by a sudden
impact - such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your
tires have been damaged, replace them.
Inflation - Tire Pressure If your tires have too much air (overinflation),
you can get the following:
The Certificationflire label, which is on the rear edge ot Unusual wear
the driver’s door, shows the correct inflation pressures
for your tires when they’re cold. “Cold” means your e Badhandling
vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven Roughride
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
Needless damage from road hazards
Notice: Don’t let anyone tell you that underinflation
or overinflation is all right. It’s not. If your tires When to Check
don’t have enough air (underinflation), you can get
the following: Check your tires once a month or more.
Too much flexing Don’t forget your compact spare tire. It should be at
60 psi (420 kPa).
Too much heat
Tire overloading How to Check
Bad wear Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You can’t tell if your tires are properly inflated
Bad handling simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look
Bad fuel economy properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
TL-. L-1.- L l--l,- L . . I<--.-:.-- A:.A
^.. I ...-A
uy ~y uut
. - Y ^ . . ^ Y

I IICY PI G V C I
II C I ~ 11 IcaRa nt;cpI UII c ar IU
moisture.

5-61
Tire Inspection and Rotation
I,‘
Tires should be rotated every 7,500 miles (12 500 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
\ /I
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-63 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-66 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
and then try to rotate or turn thetire, If it moves, usethe
folding wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-70. When rotating your tires, always use the correct rotation
pattern shown here.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
Don’t include the compact spare tire in your tire rotation.
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See “Part A: Scheduled
Maintenance Services,” in Section 6, for scheduled
rotation intervals.

5-62
After the tires have been rotated,
adjust the front and rear When It Is Time for New Tires
inflation pressures as shown on the Certification/Tire
label. Make certain that all wheel
nuts are properly One way to tell when it’s
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and time for new tires is to
Specifications on page 5- 103. check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
-3ust or dirt on awheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheelcould
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. You need a new tire if any of the following statements
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a are true:
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a You can see the indicators at three or more places
scraper or wire brush later, if you need to, to around the tire.
get all the rust or dirtoff. See “Changing a Flat You can see cord or fabric showing through the
Tire” in the Index. tire’s rubber.
The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
The tire has a bump, bulge or split.
The tire has a puncture, cut or other damage that
__ can’t be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.

5-63
Buying New Tires
To find out what kind and size of tires you need, look at
the Certificationflire label.
Mixing tires coul-. Lause you to lose control
The tires installed on your vehicle when it was newhad a while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes
Tire Petformance Criteria Specification (TPC Spec) or types (radial and bias-beltedtires), the
number on each tire’s sidewall. When you get new tires, vehicle may not handle properly, and you
get ones with thatsame TPC Spec number. That way
could have a crash. Using tiresof different
your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed
sizes may alsocause damage to your vehicle.
to give proper endurance, handling, speed rating,
Be sure to use the same size and type tires on
traction, ride and other things during normal service on
your vehicle. If your tires have an all-season tread design, all wheels. It’s all right to drive with your
the TPC number will be followed by an “MS” (for mud compact spare temporarily, it was developed
and snow). for use on your vehicle. See “Compact Spare
Tire” in the index.
If you ever replace your tires with those not having a
TPC Spec number, make sure they are the same
size, load range, speed rating and construction type
(bias, bias-belted or radial) as your original tires.

If you use bias-ply 1 1s on your vehicle, the

wheel rim flanges could develop cracksafter
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.

5-64
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
It=~Ullt=lllelltb
-.-A -A-l:*:---l fi,,,,,I
allu ~ U U I ~ I U I I Q
U
ill^+-”,
T:”-
I C I I Clvlulula
I ~ ~I IIG
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (15 ) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction - AA, A, 9, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A,
B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance. Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
._- - -1. A..- -A:-+--:-+:--
wrrlerir~ly,ilydlupih1Gl^ly, w r pea“ t I d w u I I cII la1 c ~ w z ;1 Ia L 1 t - a .
.- -L.
5-65
Temperature - A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
5-66
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced
carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
Scheduled wheel alignment and wheel balancing are
not needed. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or
your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment
may need to be reset. If you notice your vehicle
vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels
may need to be rebalanced.
Wheel Replacement
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the
wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be replaced.
If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts or Used Replacement WI els
wheel nuts, replace themonly with new GM original
equipment parts. This way,you will be sure to have the

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is

dangerous. You can’t know how it’s been used
Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel or how farit’s been driven.It could fail suddenly
bolts or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be and cause a crash. If you have to replace a
dangerous. It could affect the braking and wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be Tire Chains
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement. Notice: Use tire chains only where legal and only
I
when you must. Use only SAE Class “S” type chains
that are the proper size for your tires. Install them
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems on the front tires and tighten them as tightly
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or as possible with the ends securely fastened.
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height, Drive slowly and follow the chain manufacturer’s
!-- ~--
-I-~---I’- If . L I
L - -L-.-- --.-*-.-a:--.
vehicle ground clearance and tire or tire chain I~IS1ruC;LIVIIs.II yuu u a l ~Ileal ~ l l e
Glla~llbGUIILQ~LII~~

clearance to the body and chassis. your vehicle, stop and retighten them. If the contact
continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-70 for more fast or spinning the wheels with chains on will
information. damage your vehicle.

5-67
Accessory Inflator
Your vehicle may have an air inflator. With it, you can
inflate things like air mattresses and basketballs,
and you can also use it to bring your tires up to the
proper pressure.
The air inflator is located in the rear compartment on
the driver’s side. To remove the cover, pull the tab
on the cover and pull it off.
This is the switch for
the air inflator.
There may be an air inflator kit stored in the glove box.
It includes a 20-foot (6 m) hose with an air pressure
gage and nozzle adapters.
5-68
ting something too much can make it
....___
explode, and you or others could be injured.
Be sure to read the inflator instructions, and
inflate any object only to its recommended
pressure.
To use your air inflator system, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY or RUN.
2. Attach the appropriate nozzle adapter, if required,
to the end of the hose that has the pressure gage.
3. Attach that end of the hose to the object you wish
to inflate.
4. Remove the protective cap covering the outlet.
5. Attach the other end of the hose to the outlet.
6. Press the accessory inflator switch. The light in the
switch will come on to show the system is working.
If the air inflator system does not turn on or the
light does not come on, the fuse may be blown or
installed incorrectly. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-96 or see your dealer for service.
Your air inflator will automatically shut off after about
10 minutes. The light in the switch will blink. After about
one minute you can use the system again. Press the
inflator switch and the indicator light will come on.
Notice: Don’t run your air inflator for longer than
30 minutes at one time. If you do, you may damage
the system.
After running the air inflator for 30 minutes, wait at least
10 minutes before restarting the air inflator.
To turn off the inflator, do the following:
1. Press the switch and detach the hose, first from the
inflated object, then from the outlet.
2. Put the protective cap back on.
3. Place the inflator kit tools in the pouch, and store in
the glove box.
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs at the back
of the cover and put it in place. Push down the tab
to secure the cover.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It’s unusualfor a tire to “blow out” while you’re driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. If air
goes out of a tire, it’s much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a “blowout”, here are
a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like
a skid and may require the same correction you’d use
in a skid. In any rear blowout, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer.
Gently brake to a stop - well off the road if possible.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use
your jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-69
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard v.--nin- 'lashers.

Chan,,,lg a tire can cause an injury. The

vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured. Find a level placeto change your tire.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. Turn off the engine.
The following steps will tell you how to use the jack and
To be even more certain the vehicle won't
change a tire.
move, you can put blocksat the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the one
being changed. That would be the tire on
the other side of the vehicle, at the
opposite end.

5-70
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools

A. Jack E. Jacking Instructions

To remove the tools, do the following: 9. Strap F. Bag and Tools
C. Bracket G. Tire Bag and Cable
1. Remove the side convenience net.
D. Wing Nut (AWD only)
2. Open the jack storage compartment by lifting up the
tab and pulling the cover off. 3. Remove the jack and jacking tools by loosening
the wing nut and bracket.
4. Separate the plastic pouch from the jack and
remove the jacking tools (folding wrench and
extension) from the pouch.

5-71
 To remove the compact spare tire, do the following:

C -C

The tools you’ll be using include the jack (A),

extension (B)and folding wrench (C).
A. Hoist Shaft E.Extension
The compact spare tire is located under the rear of B. Hoist Assembly (Chisel End)
the vehicle. See “Compact Spare Tire” later in this C. Retainer F. Folding Wrench
section for more information about the compact spare. D. Compact Spare Tire
I. Attach the folding wrench to the extension and
insert the chisel end on an angle through the
hole in the rear bumper and into the hoist shaft.
2. Turn the folding wrench counterclockwise to lower
the compact spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wrench so the compact spare tire can
be pulled out from under the vehicle.

5-72

3. To remove the compact spare tire from the cable,
tilt the retainer at the end of the cable so it can be
pulled up through the wheel opening.
-. If your vehicle is an all-wheel-drive vehicle, after
removing the compact spare tire turn the wrench
clockwise to raise the cable back up.
On an AWD vehicle, you can not store a full-size
tire under the vehicle. It should be stowed inside the
vehicle by the cable provided. See “Storing the
Flat Tire on an All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” later in
this section.
If you have a front-wheel-drive vehicle, the hoist is
used to store a full-size or a flat road tire under
the vehicle. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools”
and “Storing the Flat Tire on a Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle” later in this section.
If the compact spare tire will not lower, check under the
vehicle to see if the tire is hanging loose and the cable
end and spring under the wheel plate are missing. If so,
the secondary latch system is engaged. See “Secondary
Latch System” later in this section.
To continue changing the flat tire see “Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire” later in this
section.
5-73
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle may have an underbody mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It‘s designed to stop a tire from suddenly falling off your Before beginning this procedure read all the
vehicle if the cable holding the spare tire is damaged.
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
For the secondary latch to work, the tire must be stowed
with the valve stem pointing down. instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt.Read and
Front-wheel-drive vehicles use the underbody tire hoist follow the instructions listed below.
assembly to store either the compact spare or a flat
road tire. See “Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools”
in the Index for instructions on storing the spare or To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
flat tire correctly. do the f .. )wing:
If your vehicle is equipped with all-wheel-drive, the
underbody tire hoist assembly stores only the compact
spare tire. See “Storing the Spare Tire and Tools”
later in this section for instructions. To store a flat
full-size tire correctly, see “Storing the Flat Tire on Someone standing too close during the
an All-Wheel-Drive Vehicle” later in this section.
procedure couldbe injured by the jack. If the
off the jack completely,
spare tire does not slide
make sure no one is behind you or on either
side of youas you pull the jack out from
the spare.

5-74
 1. Place the jack under the vehicle, ahead of the rear 5. Grasp the compact spare tire with both hands and
bumper. Position the center lift point of the jack pull it out from under the vehicle.
under the center of the compact spare tire. 6. Reach under the vehicle and remove the folding
2. Turn the folding wrench clockwise to raise the jack wrench and jack.
until it lifts the secondary latch device under the
wheel plate. Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire usinG
3. Keep raising tne jack untii rne compact spare tire the hoist assembly until it has been repaired or replaced.
stops moving upward and is held firmly in place,
this lets you know that the secondary latch
has released.
4. Lower the jack by turning the folding wrench
~- -~
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the compact spare tire is resting on the folding
wrench.
5-75
Removing the Wheel Covers Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
If the wheel has a center cap, use the handle of the the Spare Tire
folding wrench to pry it off. Then, with the other end of 1. Loosen the wheel
the folding wrench, loosen the nuts. nuts - but do not
remove them- using
the folding wrench.
(Turn the handle about
180 degrees, then flip
the handle backto
the starting position.
This avoids taking the
wrench off the lug nut
for each turn.)

For wheels with a wheel lock key, use the wheel

If your vehicle has the plastic “bolt-on” wheel covers,
loosen the bolts completely using the folding wrench,
and remove the wheel cover.
lock key between the lock nut and folding wrench.
The key is supplied in the front passenger door
pocket.
Notice: To help avoid damageto lock nut or wheel
lock key, do not use an impact wrench withthis key.

5-76
 2. Near each wheel, Do not raise the vehicle yet. Put the compact spare
there is a notch in tire near you.
the vehicle's body.
Position the jack and
raise the jack head until
it fits firmly into the
notch in the vehicle's
frame nearest the Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked upis
flat tire. slips off the jack you
dangerous. If the vehicle
could be badly injured or killed. Never get under
a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

Notice: Do not place the jack under the rear axle

control arms or you may damage your vehicle.
Only use theareas shown for proper jack location.
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall.To help avoid personal
injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the
iaek ...-
)'""'l i e hnad -
..--- intn
...- thn
-..- pmper h ~ befcre
~ ~
raising the vehicle.

5-77
 3. Attach the folding 6. Remove any rust or dirt
wrench to the jack, from the wheel bolts,
and turn the wrench mounting surfaces
clockwise to raise and spare wheel.
the jack head a
few inches.

4. Raise the vehicle by turning the folding wrench

clockwise in the jack. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the
compact spare tire to fit under the wheel well.
Rust or dirt on thewheel, or on the parts to
5. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off the flat tire.
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time.The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attachesto the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use
a scraper or wire brush later, if you need to,
to get all therust or dirt off.

5-78
I
Nev,. use oil or grease on st,,s or nuts. If you
do, the nuts might come loose. Your wheel
could fall off, causing a serious accident.

7. Install the compact spare tire and put the wheel

nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts
toward the wheel. Tighten each nut by hand until
the wheel is held against the hub.

8. Lower the vehicle by attaching the folding wheel

wrench to the jack and turning the wrench
counterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

5-79
 9. Tighten the wheel nuts Nofice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead
firmly in a crisscross to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
sequence, as shown. expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten wheel
the
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper torque
specification. See “Capacities and Specifications”
in the index for thewheel nut torque specification.
10. Don’t try to put a wheel cover on the compact spare
tire. It won’t fit. Store the wheel cover securely in
the rear of the vehicle until you have the flattire
repaired or replaced.
Notice: Wheel covers won’t fit on your compact
spare. If you try to put awheel cover on your
compact spare, you could damage the cover or
the spare.

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened

wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification.See ”Capacities
and Specifications” in the Index for wheel nut
torque specification.

5-80
Storing a Fla' or Spare 'ire : d Tools
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the
passenger compartment of the vehicle could
cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision,
loose equipment could strike someone.
Store all these in the properplace.
The underbody-mounted spaL, tire needs to
be stored with the valve stem pointing down.
If the spare tireis stored with the valve stem
pointing upwards, its secondary latch won't
work properly and the spare tire could loosen
and suddenly fall from your vehicle. If this
happened when your vehicle was being
driven, the tire might contacta person or
another vehicle, causing injury and, of
course, damage to itself as well. Be sure the
underbody-mounted spare tireis stored with
its valve stem pointing down.
5-8 1
Storing the Spare Tire and Tools
1. Lay the tire near the rear of the vehicle with the
valve stem down.
2. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
small center cap by tapping the back of the cap
with the extension of the shaft.
3. Slide the cable retainer through the center of the
wheel and start to raise the tire.
Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the PUSH & PULL
underside of the wheel.
4. When the tire is almost in the stored position,
turn the tire so the valve is towards the rear of
the vehicle.
This will help when you check and maintain tire
pressure in the spare.
6. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull,
5. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If the tire
vehicle. Continue turning the folding wrench until you moves, use the folding wrench to tighten the cable.
feel more than two clicks. This indicates that the
Put back alltools as they were storedin the jack storage
compact spare tire is secure and the cable is tight.
compartment andput the compartment cover back on.
The spare tire hoist cannot be overtightened.

5-82
To put the cover back on, line up the tabs on the right
of the cover with the slots in the cover opening. Push the
cover in place and push down the tab so that it rests
in the groove. This secures the cover in place.
B Follow the procedure for storing a spare tire listed
A. Strap
9. Bag and Tools
C. Jack
Store the center cap or the plastic “bolt-on” wheel
covers until a full size tire is put back on the vehicle.
When you replace the compact spare with a full-size tire,
reinstall the bolt-on wheel covers or the center cap.
Tighten them “hand tight” over the wheel nuts, using the
folding wrench.
Storing the Flat Tire on a Front-Wheel
Drive Vehicle
previously.
5-83
Storing the Flat Tire on an All-Wheel-Drive
Vehicle
1 . Remove the tire storage bag and cable package
from the jack storage area.
2. If the vehicle has aluminum wheels, remove the
small center cap by tapping the back of the cap
with the extension of the shaft.
3. Put the flat tire in the tire storage bag and place il
in the rear storage area with the valve stem
pointing toward the front of the vehicle.

A. Cable
B. Liftgate Hinges
C. Door Striker

4. Pull the cable through the door striker and the

center of the wheel.

5-84
 5. Hook the cable onto 7. Make sure the metal
the outside portion of tube is centered at
the liftgate hinges. the striker. Push
the tube towards the
front of the vehicle.

6. Pull on the cable to make sure it is secure. 8. Close the liftgate and make sure that it is latched.

5-85
Compact Spare Tire
Although the compact spare tire was fully inflated
when your vehicle was new, it can lose air after a time.
Check the inflation pressure regularly. It should be
60 psi (420 kPa).
After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,
you should stop as soon as possible and make sure
your spare tire is correctly inflated. The compact spare
is made to perform well at speeds up to 65 mph
(105 km/h) for distances up to 3,000 miles (5 000 km),
so you can finish your trip and have your full-size
tire repaired or replaced where you want. Of course,
it’s best to replace your spare with a full-size tire as soon
as you can. Your spare will last longer and be in good
shape in case you need it again.
Notice: When the compact spare is installed, don’t
take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
with guide rails. The compact spare can get caught
on the rails. That can damage the tire andwheel,
and maybe other parts of your vehicle.
Don’t use your compact spare on other vehicles.
5-86
And don’t mix your compact spare tire or wheel with
other wheels or tires. They won’t fit. Keep your sparetire
and its wheel together.
Notice: Tire chains won’t fit your compact spare.
Using them can damage your vehicle and can
damage the chains too. Don’t use tire chains on
your compact spare.
All-Wheel Drive
After installing a compact spare tire on a vehicle with
all-wheel drive you will need to drive with light to
moderate acceleration, for 10 seconds, in a straight line.
This action will allow the vehicle to detect the compact
spare tire and disable the all-wheel drive system.
The AWD DISABLE message will come on indicating
that the all-wheel drive system is off. You may detect
a slight pull during this time, but this is normal.
Notice: You may damage your vehicle’s all-wheel
drive system if your vehicle
is driven foran extended
period with a compact spare tire installed
and
the all-wheel drive system in operation.
See “All-Wheel DriveSystem’’ and “AWD Disable
Warning Message’’ in the Index for more information.
Appearance Care Don’t use any of these unless this manual says you
can. In many uses, these will damage your vehicle:
Remember, cleaning products can be hazardous. 0 Alcohol
Some are toxic. Otherscan burst into flames if you
strike a match or get themon a hot part of the vehicle. Laundry Soap
Some are dangerousif you breathe their fumes in a Bleach
closed space. When you use anything from a container to
clean your vehicle,be sure to follow the manufacturer’s Reducing Agents
warnings and instructions.And always open your
doors or windows when you’re cleaning the inside. Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Never use these to cleanyour vehicle:
Use a vacuum cleaner often to get rid of dust and
Gasoline loose dirt. Wipe vinyl, leather, plastic and painted
Benzene surfaces with a clean, damp cloth.
Naphtha FabridCarpet
CarbonTetrachloride Your dealer has cleaners for the cleaning of fabric
Acetone and carpet. They will clean normal spots and stains
very well.
PaintThinner
You can get GM-approved cleaning products from your
Turpentine dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
LacquerThinner on page 5-93.
NailPolishRemover
They can all be hazardous - some more than
others - and they can all damage your vehicle, too.

5-87
Here are some cleaning tips:
0 Always read the instructions on the cleaner label.
Clean up stains as soon as you can - before
they set.
Carefully scrape off any excess stain.
* Use a clean cloth or sponge, and change to a clean
area often. A soft brush may be used if stains are
stubborn.
If a ring forms on fabric after spot cleaning, clean
the entire area immediately or it will set.
Using Cleaner on Fabric
1. Vacuum and brush the area to remove any loose dirt.
2. Always clean a whole trim panel or section.
Mask surrounding trim along stitch or welt lines.
3. Follow the directions on the container label.
4. Apply cleaner with a clean sponge. Don’t saturate
the material and don’t rub it roughly.
5. As soon as you’ve cleaned the section, use a
sponge to remove any excess cleaner.
6. Wipe cleaned area with a clean, water-dampened
towel or cloth.
7. Wipe with a clean cloth and let dry.
5-88
Special Fabric Cleaning Problems
Stains caused by such things as catsup, coffee (black),
egg, fruit, fruit juice, milk, soft drinks, vomit, urine
and blood can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain, then sponge the
soiled area with cool water.
2. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
3. If an odor lingers after cleaning vomit or urine,
treat the area with a water/baking soda solution:
1 teaspoon (5 ml) of baking soda to 1 cup (250 ml)
of lukewarm water.
4. Let dry.
Stains caused by candy, ice cream, mayonnaise, chili
sauce and unknown stains can be removed as follows:
1. Carefully scrape off excess stain.
2. Clean with cool water and allow to dry completely.
3. If a stain remains, follow the cleaner instructions
described earlier.
Vinyl
Use warm water and a clean cloth.
e Rub with a clean, damp cloth to remove dirt.
You may have to do this more than once.
Things like tar, asphalt and shoe polish will stain if
you don't get them off quickly. Use a clean cloth
and vinyl/leather cleaner. See your dealer for
this product.
Leather
Use a soft cloth with lukewarm water and a mild soap or
saddle soap and wipe dry with a soft cloth. Then, let
the leather dry naturally. Do not use heat to dry.
For stubborn stains, use a leather cleaner. See your
dealer for this product.
0 Never use oils, varnishes, solvent-based or abrasive
cleaners, furniture polish or shoe polish on leather.
Top of the Instrument Panel
Use only mild soap and water to clean the top surfaces
of the instrument panel. Sprays containing silicones
or waxes may cause annoying reflections in the
windshield and even make it difficult to see through
the windshield under certain conditions.
Interior Plastic Components
Use only a mild soap and water solution on a soft cloth
or sponge. Commercial cleaners may affect the
surface finish.
Glass Surfaces
Glass should be cleaned often. GM Glass Cleaner or
a liquid household glass cleaner will remove normal
tobacco smoke and dust films on interior glass.
See GM Vehicle CardAppearance Materials on
page 5-93.
Notice: Don't use abrasive cleaners on glass,
bvnIc! p!scing
because they may c a w e s~~ratches.
decals on the inside rear window, since they
may have to be scraped off later. If abrasive
cleaners are used on the inside of the rear window,
an electric defogger element may be damaged.
Any temporary license should not be attached
across the defogger grid.
5-89
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth at least every six
months. During very cold, damp weather more frequent
application may be required. See Part D: Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6- 16.
5-90
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle
The paint finish on your vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention and durability.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it
clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.
Don’t wash your vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Don’t usestrong soaps or
chemical detergents. Be sureto rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residuecompletely. You can get
GM-approved cleaning products from your dealer.
See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materialson
page 5-93. Don’t usecleaning agents that are petroleum
based, or that contain acid or abrasives.All cleaning
agents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry
on the surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a
soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
Before you enter an automatic car wash, if your vehicle
is equipped with the optional power sliding door, be
sure to have the switch for the power sliding door
override feature enabled. See Power Sliding Door (PSD)
on page2-16.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
your vehicle.
Cleaning Exterior LarnpdLenses
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under “Washing Your Vehicle”
previously.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can getGM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-93.
If your vehicle has a “basecoaflclearcoat” paint finish.
The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoaflclearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
dl!!! the finish nr !!%!\re rwIr! marks-
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicte as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Windshield, Backglass and Wiper
Blades
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
?l‘i(3!b&g l/klrlm~!y yjth 3 ++h s v h c d +I!! sbr,gt,G;
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
5-9 1
Aluminum Wheels
Keep your wheels clean using a soft clean cloth
with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.
After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel.
A wax may then be applied.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Don’t use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes on
them because you could damage the surface. Do not
use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Don’t take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels
Tires
To clean your tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: When applying a tire dressing, always take
care to wipe off any overspray or splash from all
painted surfaces on the body or wheels of the
vehicle. Petroleum-based products may damage the
paint finish and tires.
5-92
Sheet Metal Damage
If your vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair
expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up
materials avaliable from your dealer or other service
outlets. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your dealer’s body and paint shop.
Underbody Maintenance GM Vehicle Care/Appearance
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust Materials
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, accelerated corrosion (rust) can occur on See your GM dealer for more information on purchasing
the underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan the following products.
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection. GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Some weatherand atmospheric conditions can create a hite Sidewall Tire
chemical fallout. Airbornepollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage can
take two forms; blotchy,ringlet-shaped discolorations, I Cleans vinyl tops,
qncl orn-11 ivrnmm3I-v rlnrl, ,-nn+r. n+-h-A :-+- i
h - --:-+
UI IU m
. I IUII I I s uyu~uaucll r\ D ~ W LGLU~ IGU II ILW LI IC pall I L
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will Removes dirt, grime,
Glass Cleaner
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of smoke and finaertxints.
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km] of purchase,
whichever occurs first.

5-93
 GM Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials GM Vehicle Care/A ppearance Materials
(cont’d) (C( lnt’d)
Description I Usage Description Usage
Removes dirt and grime Medium foaming
Chrome and Wire from chrome wheels and shampoo. Cleans
Wheel Cleaner wire wheel covers. Wash Wax Concentrate and lightly waxes.
I
Biodegradable and
I Removes dust, phosphate free.
fingerprints, and surface
Finish Enhancer contaminants, Spray on Quickly and easily
wipe off. removes spots and stains
Spot Lifter
from carpets, vinyl and
Removes swirl marks, cloth upholstery.
fine scratches and other
Swirl Remover Polish Odorless spray odor
light surface
contamination. eliminator used on
Odor Eliminator
fabrics, vinyl, leather
Removes light scratches and carpet.
Cleaner Wax
and protects finish.
See your General Motors parts department for these
Cleans, shines and products. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Foaming Tire Shine
protects in one easy step, Lubricants on Daae 6-16.
Low Gloss
no wiping necessary.

5-94
Vehicle Identification Service Parts Identification Label
You’ll find this label on the inside of the glove box door.
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) It’s very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label is:
0 your VIN,
the model designation,
0 paint information and
0 a list of all production options and special
equipment.
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears
on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel,
on the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through
the windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN
also appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service
Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration.
Engine Identification
Th- O + h -hnr--+nr :- ..-..r \Ilk1 :r. +Lr.- m m : - n r.nA-
I I I G OLI I b~IUI a b t t l 11 I YUUI v IIY I J LI IC GI IYII IG ~ W U G .

This code will help you identify your engine,

specifications and replacement parts.

5-95
Electrical System
Add-on Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless youcheck with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’tbe covered by your
warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they should.
Your vehicle has an air bag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Air Bag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-76.
Headlamp Wiring
The headlamp wiring is protected by an internal circuit
breaker in the instrument panel fuse panel. An electrical
overload will cause the lamps to go on and off, or in
some cases to remain off. If this happens, have
your headlamp wiring checked right away.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to
heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor
cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem, be sure to get it fixed.
5-96
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers in the instrument panel fuse panel
protect the power windows and other power accessories.
When the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker
opens and closes, protecting the circuit until the
problem is fixed.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage or use one of the spare fuses in the
underhood fuse block. Just pick some feature of your
vehicle that you can get along without - like the radio
or cigarette lighter - and use its fuse, if it is the
right amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
There are two fuse blocks in your vehicle, the instrument
panel fuse block and the underhood fuse block.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block Pull the door open to access the instrument panel
fuse block.
The instrument panel fuse
block is located to the right
of the glove box on the
end of the instrument
panel.

PCWCRANK FRTMPWSHR MALL CLUSTER RR WPWSHR BCM PRGRM

RH HEAD LP
PASSKEY HAZARD STOPLAMP LHHEADLPLOW Low

I Fuse I Usage I
I :!ZKLIGHT
PCM/PASS
Steering Wheel Radio Control
Switches (Illumination)
Instrument Cluster to PRNDL
KEYKLUSTER Indicators
I PWR MIRROR I Power Remote Control Mirror Switch I
I CRUISE I Cruise Control Module, Switch and
Release Switch

5-97
I Fuse I Usage I Fuse I Usage
I Not Used
I
Blank

PCM/CRANK I Powertrain Control Module (PCM),

Ignition Crank
LH T/LP

RR DEFOG/
I Passenger’s Side Taillamp
(Export Only)
Rear Window Defogger Relay,
HTD MIRROR Heated Mirrors
I PASS KEY I PASS-Key@Ill System I
ON STAR onstar@
ILOCK
PWR I Locks
Power
Door I
Inflatable
SIR
Restraint
Control
Module
I HTD MIRROR I Heated Mirrors I
I RH T/LP I Driver’s Side Taillamp (Export Only) I HVAC
BLOWER
I Heater-A/C
Control

I RR FOG LP I Fog Lamps (Export Only) I Instrument Cluster, Body Control

CIGAR/DIC/ Cigarette Lighter, DIC, Front MALL Module, Electronic Level Control
APO FRT Auxiliary Power Outlets, Data Link CLUSTER (ELC) Sensor and Relay, Theft,
Door Ajar
I T/SIG I TurnSwitch
Signal I STOPLAMP I StoplampSwitch
PWR QTR Interior Lamp and Multifunction
Switch (Power Vent Switch), Module/Electronic Brake Control
VENT CLUSTER Module/Electronic Brake Traction
Auto Level BATT Control Module (EBCM/EBTCM)
Windshield WiperNVasher Motor
and Switch Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)
ENHANCED Canister Vent Solenoid Valve,
I HAZARD I Hazard Switch I All-Wheel Drive (AWD)
I I
RR PWR SCKT Rear Electric Accessory Plug
Housing
Used Not Blank

I DRL Daytime Running Lamp Control

Module
ELC Air Compressor and ELC
Heiaht Sensor. Trailer Harness

5-98
 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
CTSY LAMP Courtesy Lamp Air Inlet Actuator, DIC Display, DRL
~~ ~ ~ ~ _ _ _ _ ~~

HVAC/DIC/DRU Control Module, Heater-A/C Control,

BCM, Electronic Brake Control HEATED SEAT Temperature Door Actuator (Front)
Indicator Lamp Driver Module, and Rear Window Defogger Relay
IGN 1 Instrument Panel Cluster, Rear Side
Door Actuator Control Module, BCM PRGRAM BCM Programming
Rear Windows, Rear Parking Aid
RH HEAD Driver’s Side Low Beam Headlamp
RR HVAC Rear HVAC-A/C Control LP LOW (Export Only)
TEMP CONT
Rear Window Wiper Motor,
RH HEAD
LPOnly)
HIGH
Driver’s Side High Beam Headlamp
(Export I
RR WPR/
WSHR
Rear Window WiperNVasher and
Multifunction Switch (Rear Window
Wiper/Washer Switch)
PCM/ABS I IGN MAIN Relay and PCM,
Electronic Brake Control Module
LH HEADLP
I
Passenger’s Side Low Beam
Headlamp (Export Only) Circuit Breaker I
I
Usage
1
Passenger’s Side High Beam Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Headlamp (Export Only) HEADLAMP Control Module, Headlamp and
Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch
I Blank I Not Used
I Blank I Not Used PWRSLDDR I Power Sliding Door
Blank Not Used
PWRWDO i Front Power Windows i
I
I
PWR/HEATED Six-Way Power Seats and Rear
I RAP RELAY I
I
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Relay
SEAT PSD
I
Side Door Actuator Motor
Blank l-Nat Used FRT HVAC
HI B4WR
BlowerMotor Hi Speed Relay Module
I
5-99
Underhood Fuse Block

A
This fuse block is located (71
in the engine compartment, [61
in front of the windshield
washer fluid reservoir.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for more information [2)
on location. 111

I Fuse Usage
The fuses marked spare are available if a replacement Coolant Fans
fuse is needed.
To remove the cover, turn the knob counterclockwise I 2 Not Used
and lift up. Circuit Breakers: Front Comfort
Controls Hi Blower, and Headlamp
When finished, to put the cover back on, turn the knob Fuses (Instrument Panel): Hazard
clockwise to tighten it. Make sure that the remote and Stoplamp, PASS-Key@
positive (+) terminal cover is on correctly. Circuit Breaker: Power Seat and
Power Sliding Door. Fuses
4 (Instrument Panel): Electronic Level
Control and Rear Defogger, Trailer,
Fog Lamps

5-100
 Fuse Usage Fuse Usage
Ignition Switch to Fuses (Instrument
Panel): ABS/TCS Ignition, Cruise,
DRL, Electronic PRNDL, Ignition 1, Evaporative Emissions (EVAP)
AWD, PSD, Air Bag, Turn Signal 21 Canister Purge Valve, Heated
5 Oxygen Sensors 1 and 2, Mass Air
and Powertrain Control Module
[IGN MAIN Relay (Underhood Fuse Flow (MAF) Sensor
Block: A/C Clutch, Electronic
Ignition, Ignition l-U/H, INJ, TCC)] I 22 I Not Used I
I I
6 Fans Coolant I 23 I Not Used
Fuses (Instrument Panel): ABS I 24 I Not Used I
Module Battery, Cigarette Lighter,
Courtesy Lamps, Front Power I 25 I Ignition Control Module (ICM) I
Socket, Power Locks, Power Mirrors
and Right Rear Power Socket,
I 26 I Not Used I
OnStar, RAP
Ignition Switch to Fuses (VP): Body
I 27 I Transaxle Range Switch to
Back-up Lamps
Control Module Program, Front
Comfort Controls Low/Medium
Blower, Front WiperANasher,
I 28 I A/C Clutch Relay to A/C
Compressor Clutch Oil

HVAC/DRL, MALURadio/DIC, I I.
Puwer Guarier iierri, Zear n v n b ,
,n - I *ulc
I ’
Driver Information Display, Heater
CQr?!!3!, !?.ldiQ, Re2r !L!-! 2nd
RH) Side Door Actuator Control
I
,
Rear Wiper/Washer. SWC
Accessory and Power Window 29 Motor, Remote Control Door Lock
Circuit Breaker, RAP Receiver (RCDLR), Security
Indicator Lamp and Theft-Deterrent
I 18 I Fuel Injectors 1-6 I Shock Sensor

5-101
I Fuse I Usage I
Automatic Transaxle (Torque
Converter Clutch Solenoids)
I 9 I
1,Fan
Right Left Fan 2 I
31 Stoplamp Switch to Powertrain 10 Left Fan 2
Control Module
11
Fuses: A/C Clutch, Ignition l-U/H,
I 32 I Fuel
RelayPump I Electronic Ignition, TCC, Injectors
Powertrain Control Module I 12 I Fan
Right 21,Fan
Left I
Not Used I Clutch
13 I A/C I
Fog Lamp Relay Fuel Pump

I 36
Relay I Horn I Not Used
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Horn
Control Module, Headlamps and
37 Instrument Panel Dimmer Switch Left Fog Lamp, Right Fog Lamp,
17
Theft-Deterrent Relay to Headlamps Fog Lamp Indicator

Not Used

40 Mini Fuse Puller

I [ T I I Air Conditioning Clutch Diode

5-102
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric measurements.
Please refer to Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-16 for more information.

I Capacities
Application English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant Systems

Front A/C 1.7 Ibs. 0.8 kg
Front and Rear A/C 2.2 Ibs. 1.0 kg

Automatic Transaxle
Pan Removal and Replacement 7.4 quarts 7.0 L
Complete Overhaul 10.0 quarts 9.5 L

AWD Automatic Transaxle

Pan Removal and Replacement 8.7 quarts 8.3 L
Complete Overhaul 10.8 quarts 10.3 L

Cooling System
With A/C 9.6 quarts 9.1 L
With Rear Climate Control ~ ~ 11.9 quarts
~~ ~ ~~~~~ 11.3 L-

5-1 03
Engine Specifications

I Engine I VIN Code I Transaxle I Spark Plug

Gap I Firing
Order
V6 E Automatic 0.060 inches 1-2-3-4-5-6
L
(15 2 mm)

5-104
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter A-I 208C*
Engine Oil Filter PF47
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Kit GM Part No. 52482929
Spark Pluas 41-1 01*
Windshield Wiper Blades
Length 24.0 inches (60.0 cm)
Type Shepherd’s Hook

Wiper Blade (Backglass)

Length 16.0 inches (40.6 cm)
TY Pe Shepherd’s Hook

*ACDelco@ part number.

5-105
b NOTES

5-106
 Section 6 Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ...................................... 6.2
Introduction ................................................... 6.2
Your Vehicle and the Environment .................... 6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6.2
How This Section is Organized ......................... 6.3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services ...........6.4
Using Your Maintenance Schedule .................... 6.4
Scheduled Maintenance ................................... 6-5
Part B: Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-10
At Each Fuel Fill .......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................. 6-10
At Least Twice a Year ................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Year ................................... 6-11
Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections .........6-14
Steering. Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Boot and Seal Inspection ............................ 6.14
Exhaust System Inspection ............................ 6.14
Fuel System Inspection .................................. 6.14
Engine Cooling System Inspection ................... 6.14
Throttle System Inspection ............................. 6.15
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive
Inspection ................................................ 6.15
Brake System Inspection ................................ 6.15
Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ................................................ 6.16
Part E: Maintenance Record ........................... 6.18
6- 1
Maintenance Schedule Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
Introduction vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance procedures
are important. Improper vehicle maintenance can
even affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper
fluid levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase
KEEP ENGINE OIL
AT THE PROPER the level of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect
-EVEL ANDCHANGE AS I our environment, and to keep your vehicle in good
RECOMMENDED ~ condition, please maintain your vehicle properly.
I
Maintenance Requirements
Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections and
recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this
manual are necessary to keep your vehicle in good
working condition. Any damage caused by failure
to follow recommended maintenance may not be
covered by warranty.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan

supplements your new vehicle warranties. See your
Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer
for details.

6-2
How This Section is Organized
This maintenance schedule is divided into five parts:
“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services” explains
what to have done and how often. Some of these
services can be complex, so unless you are technically
qualified and have the necessary equipment, you
should let your dealer’s service department or another
qualified service center do these jobs.
F ming main1 ance Irk
on
a hide
~
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for thejob. If you have any doubt,
have a qualified technician do the work.
If you want to get the service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information onpage 7-10.
“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells you what
should be checked and when. It also explains what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections” explains
important inspections that your dealer’s service
department or another qualified service center
should perform.
“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants” lists
some recommended products necessary to help
keep your vehicle properly maintained. These products,
or their equivalents, should be used whether you do
the work yourself or have it done.
“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place for you to
record and keep track of the maintenance performed
on your vehicle. Keep your maintenance receipts.
They may be needed to qualify your vehicle for
warranty repairs.
6-3
Part A: Scheduled Maintenance
Services
This part contains engine oil and chassis lubrication
scheduled maintenance which explains the engine oil
life system and how it indicates when to change
the engine oil and filter. Lubricate chassis components
with each oil change. Also, listed are scheduled
maintenance services which are to be performed at the
mileage intervals specified.
Using Your Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors wantto help you to keep your
vehicle in good working condition. But we don’t know
exactly how you’ll drive it. You maydrive short distances
only a fewtimes a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may useyour
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer.
6-4
This part tells you the maintenance services you
should have done and when you should schedule them.
When you go to your dealer for your service needs,
you’ll know that GM-trained and supported service
people will perform the work using GM parts.
The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listed in
Part D. Make sure whoever services your vehicle uses
them. All parts should be replaced and all necessary
repairs done before you or anyone else drives the
vehicle.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on your vehicle’s
Certificationflire label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-34.
are driven on reasonable road surfaces within
driving limits.
use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
Scheduled Maintenance
The services shown in this schedule up to 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) should be repeated after 100,000 miles
(166 000 km) at the same intervals for the life of
this vehicle. The services shown at 150,000 miles
(240 000 km) should be repeated at the same interval
after 150,000 miles (240 000 km) for the life of this
vehicle.
See Part 5: Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10
and Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections on
page 6- 14.
Footnotes
t The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warrantyor limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle 's useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
mainienance be recoraea.
+A good time to check yourbrakes is during tire
rotation. See Brake System Inspection on page 6-15.
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by the GM
Oil Life System (or every 12 months, whichever
occurs first). Reset the system.
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on
engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on
mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at
which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system towork properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is
necessary. A change engine oil message will come on.
Change your oil as soon as possible within the next
two times you stop for fuel. It is possible that, if you are
driving under the best conditions, the oil life system
may not indicate that an oil change is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and atthis time the system
must be reset. It is also important to check your oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level.
6-5
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed. See Engine Oil on
page 5-74 for information on resetting the system.
An Emission Control Service.
Lubricate chassis components with each engine oil
and filter change.
Lubricate the suspension, steering linkage, transaxle
shift linkage and the underbody contact points and
linkage.
After the services are performed, record the date,
odometer reading and who performed the service on the
maintenance record pages in Part E of this schedule.
6-6
7,500 Miles (12 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire lnspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
15,000 Miles (25 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
Cl Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
22,500 Miles (37500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
30,000 Miles (50 000 km)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
37,500 Miles (62 500 km)
c3 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
45,000Miles (75 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
arive reguiariy unuer Uusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
50,000 Miles (83 000 km)
c1 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of
these conditions:
- In heavy city traffic where the outside
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
If you do not use your vehicle under any of these
conditions, change the fluid and filter at 100,000 miles
(166 000 km).
52,500 Miles (87 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-7
60,000 Miles (100 000 km)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
67,500 Miles (112 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
75,000 Miles (125 000 km)
0 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are driving in
dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.
An Emission Control Service. (See footnote t.)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
6-8
82,500 Miles (137 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
90,000 Miles (150 000 km)
0 Replace passenger compartment air filter. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter
may require replacement more often.
0 Replace engine air cleaner filter. An Emission
Control Service.
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
97,500 Miles (162 500 km)
0 Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-62 for proper rotation pattern and additional
information. (See footnote +.)
100,000 Miles (166 000 km) 150,000 Miles (240000 km)
0 Inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control U Drain, flush and refill cooling system (or every
Service. 60 months since last service, whichever occurs first).
0 Replace spark plugs. An Emission Control Service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-23 for what to use.
Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure
0 Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter if the cap and neck. Pressure test the cooling system
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of and pressure cap. An Emission Control Service.
these conditions:
0 Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission
- In heavy city traffic where the outside Control Service.
temperature regularly reaches 90°F (32°C)
or higher.
- In hilly or mountainous terrain.
- When doing frequent trailer towing.
- Uses such as found in taxi, police or delivery
service.
0 If you haven’t used your vehicle under severe service
conditions listed previously and, therefore, haven’t
changed your automatic transaxle fluid, change both
the fluid and filter.

6-9
Part B: Owner Checks and Services
Listed in this part are owner checks and services
which should be performed at the intervals specified to
help ensure the safety, dependability and emission
control performance of your vehicle.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Part D.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important foryou or a service station attendant to
perform these underhood checks at each fuelfill.
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-14 for further
details.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL@
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-23 for further details.
6-10
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer tank and add theproper fluid if necessary. See
Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-38 for further details.
At Least Once a Month
Tire Inflation Check
Make sure tries are inflated to the correct pressures.
Don’t forget to check your spare tire. See Tires on
page 5-60 for further details.
Cassette Tape Player Service
Clean cassette tape player. Cleaning should be done
every 50 hours of tape play. See Audio Systern(s)
on page 3-63 for further details.
At Least Twice a Year
Restraint System Check
Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all yourbell:s,
buckles, latch plates, retractors and anchorages are
working properly. Look for anyother loose or damaged
safety belt system parts. If you see anything that might
keep asafety belt system from doing its job, have it
repaired. Have anytorn or frayed safety belts replaced.
Also look for any opened or broken air bag coverings,
and have them repaired or replaced. (The air bag
system does not need regular maintenance.)
Wiper Blade Check
Inspect wiper blades for wear orcracking. Replace
blade inserts that appear worn or damaged or that
streak or miss areas of the windshield. Also see
Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle onpage 5-90.
Spare Tire Check
At least twice a year, after the monthly inflation check of
the spare tire determines that the spare is inflated to
the correct tire inflation pressure, make sure that
the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try
to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, use the folding
wrench to tighten the cable. See Changing a Flat Tire
on page5-70.
Weatherstrip Lubrication
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather more frequent application may be
required. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page6-16.
Automatic Transaxle Check
Check the transaxle fluid level; add if needed. See
Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 5-20.A fluid loss
may indicate a problem. Check the system and repair
if needed.
At Least Once a Year
Key Lock Cylinders Service
Lubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricant
specified in Part D.
Body Lubrication Service
Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assemblies,
secondary latches, pivots, spring anchor and release
pawl, hood and door hinges, rear folding seats, fuel door
hinge, liftgate hinges, power sliding door cable and
sliding door track(s). Part D tells you what to use.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exnosed tn ;I cnrrnsive enyirnnm~nf.
6-11
Starter Switch Check
r-When you are doing this check, the vGIlicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
2. Firmly apply both theparking brake and the regular
brake. See Parking Brake onpage 2-39if necessary.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The starter
should work only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the starter works in any other position, your
vehicle needs service.
6-12
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control
System Check
When you are doing this check, the vehicle
could move suddenly. If it does, you or others
could be injured. Follow the steps below.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-39 if necessary.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately
if the vehicle begins to move.
3. With the engine off, turn the key to the RUN
position, but don’t start the engine. Without applying
the regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), your vehicle needs service.
Ignition Transaxle Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition key to LOCK in each shift lever position.
The key should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
The key should come out only in LOCK.
Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Park (P) Mechanism Che+
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
I to move.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
e To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and transaxle in NEUTRAL (N),
slowly remove foot pressure from the regular
brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is held by
the parking brake only.
To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding ability:
With the engine running, shift to PARK (P). Then
release the parking brake followed by the regular
brake.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect,
I
6-13
Part C: Periodic Maintenance
Inspections
Listed in this part are inspections and services which
should be performed at least twice a year (for instance,
each spring and fall). You should let your dealer’s
service department or other qualified service center
do these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairs
are completed at once.
Proper procedures to perform these services may be
found in a service manual. See Service Publications
Ordering Information on page 7-IO.
Steering, Suspension and Front
Drive Axle Boot and Seal Inspection
Inspect the front and rear suspension and steering
system for damaged, loose or missing parts, signs of
wear or lack of lubrication. Inspect the power steering
lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,
cracks, chafing, etc. Clean and then inspect the drive
axle boot seals for damage, tears or leakage. Replace
seals if necessary.
6-14
Exhaust System Inspection
Inspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect the body
near the exhaust system. Look for broken, damaged,
missing or out-of-position parts as well as open seams,
holes, loose connections or other conditions which
could cause a heat build-up in the floor pan or could let
exhaust fumes into the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust
on page2-43.
Fuel System Inspection
Inspect the complete fuel system for damage or leaks.
Engine Cooling System Inspection
Inspect the hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings and clamps; replace as needed. Clean the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser.
To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test of
the cooling system and pressure cap is recommended
at least once a year.
Throttle System Inspection Brake System Inspection
Inspect the throttle systemfor interference or binding, Inspect the complete system. Inspect brake lines and
and for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,
as needed. Replace any components that have high chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads for wear and rotors
effort or excessive wear. Do not lubricate accelerator for surface condition. Also inspect drum brake linings
and cruise control cables. for wear and cracks. Inspect other brake parts, including
drums, wheel cylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc.
Check parking brake adjustment. You may need to
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) have your brakes inspected more often if your driving
habits or conditions result in frequent braking.
and Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive
Inspection
Every 12 months or at engine oil change intervals,
check rear differential andtransfer case and add
lubricant when necessary. A fluid loss could indicate
a problem; check and have it repaired, if needed.
Check vent hoses at transfer case and differential for
kinks and proper installation.

6-15
Part D: Recommended FluidsFluid/Lubricant Usage
and Lubricants Hydraulic BrakeDelcoSupreme 11 BrakeFluid
System or equivalent DOT-3 brake
fluid.
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number or specification may be obtained from your Windshield GM
Optikleen
Washer Solvent
dealer. Washer Solvent or equivalent.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
Fluid/Lubricant System (GM
Part No. US. 1052884,
Usage in Canada 993294, or equivalent).
Engine Oil Engine oil with the American
Petroleum Institute Certified for Automatic DEXRON-Ill Automatic
Gasoline Engines starburst Transaxle Transmission
Fluid.
symbol of the proper viscosity. Lock
Multi-Purpose
Key Lubricant,
To determine the preferred Cylinders Superlube
(GM
Part
No. U.S.
viscosity for your vehicle’s 12346241, in Canada 10953474,
engine, see Engine Oil on or equivalent).
page 5- 14.
Chassis Lubricant
Chassis
Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable Lubrication (GM Part No. U.S.
12377985, in
water and use only DEX-COOL Canada 88901 242, or equivalent)
Coolant. See Engine Coolant on or lubricant meeting requirements
page 5-23. of NLGl#2, Category LB or
GC-LB.

6-16
 Usage FluWLubricant Usage I FluWLubricant
Carrier VERSATRAKTMFluid Hood and Door Multi-Purpose Lubricant,
Assembly - (GM Part No. U.S. 1237851 4, Hinges, Rear Superlube (GM Part No.
Differential in Canada 88901045). Folding Seat, U.S. 12346241, in Canada
(Rear Drive Fuel Door 10953474, or equivalent).
Module) and Hinge, Liftgate
Transfer Hinges, Power
Case (Power Sliding Door
Transfer Unit) Cable
Hood Latch Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol Sliding Door Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
Assembly, (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, Track (GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,
Secondary in Canada 992723, or equivalent) in Canada 992723, or equivalent)
Latch, Pivots, or lubricant meetina reauirements or lubricant meetina reauirements
Spring Anchor of NLGI H , CategGry L'B o r & NLGI H , CategGry LB or
and Release GC-LB. GC-LB.
Pawl
Weatherstrip Dielectric Silicone Grease
Conditioning (GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 10953014,
or eauivalent).

6-17
Part E: Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading and who performed the service and
any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance” on the following record
pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

6-18
Maintenance Record (cont’d)

6-19
 Maintenance Record (cont’d)

6-20
 Section 7 Customer Assistance Information
Customer Assistance Information ......................7.2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7.2
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone ( l T Y ) Users ............................... -7-3
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7.4
GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Disabilities .................................................. 7.5
Roadside Assistance Program .......................... 7.5
Courtesy Transportation ................................... 7.7
Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Government ............................................... 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Government ............................................... 7.9
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .......................................7.9
Service Publications Ordering Information .........7.10
7- 1
Customer Assistance
Information
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to Oldsmobile. Normally, any concerns
with the sales transaction or the operation of your
vehicle will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or parts
manager, contact the owner of the dealership or
the general manager.
7-2
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of dealership
management, it appears yourconcern cannot be
resolved by thedealership without further help, contact
the Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center bycalling
1-800-442-6537. In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication Centrein Oshawa by calling
1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
We encourage youto call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Vehicle Identification Number (This is available from
the vehicle registration or title, or the plate at the top
left of the instrument panel and visible through the
windshield.)
Dealership name and location
Vehicle delivery date and present mileage
When contacting Oldsmobile, please remember that
your concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with the
GM/BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to
your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
booklet for information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Programis an out of court program
administered by theCouncil of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputesregarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretationof the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Although you may berequired to resort to this informal
dispute resolutionprogram prior to filing a court action,
use ofthe program is free of charge and your case will
generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree
with the decision given in yourcase, you may reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB using the toll-free telephone
number or writethem at the following address:
BBB Auto Line
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1804
Telephone: 1-800- 955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs),
Oldsmobile has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer
A s s i s t a n c e C e n t e r A n y TTY I s e r c a ncommlmicate
with Oldsmobile by dialing: 1-800-833-OLDS (6537).
(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)
7-3
Customer Assistance Offices Canada
Oldsmobile encourages customers to call the toll-free General Motors of Canada Limited
number for assistance. If a U.S. customer wishes Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
to write to Oldsmobile, the letter should be addressed 1908 Colonel Sam Drive
to Oldsmobile’s Customer Assistance Center. Oshawa, Ontario L I H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
United States 1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)
Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
P.O. Box 33171
Detroit, MI 48232-5171 All Overseas Locations
1-800-442-6537
1-800-833-6537 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs)) Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-442-OLDS (6537)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022 Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
From Puerto Rico: Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English) and U.S. Virgin Islands)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022 General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
From U.S. Virgin Islands: Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
1-800-496-9994 Col. Lomas de Bezares
Fax Number: 31 3-381-0022 C.P. 11910 Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29 0 800

7-4
GM Mobility Program for Persons
with Disabilities
This program, available to
qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to
$1,000 toward aftermarket
driver or passenger
adaptive equipment you
may require for your
vehicle (hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter
lifts, etc.).
This program can also provide you with free resource
information, such as areadriver assessment centers and
mobility equipment installers. The program is available
for a limited period of time from the date of vehicle
purchase/lease. See your dealer for more details or call
ine Givi iviobiiiiy Assisiance Center ai i-KG-323-9935.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.
Roadside Assistance Program
Security While You Travel
1-800-442-OLDS (6537)
As the proud owner of a new Oldsmobile vehicle, you
are automatically enrolled in the Oldsmobile Roadside
Assistance program. This value-added service is
intended to provide you with peace of mind as you drive
in the city or travel the open road.
Oldsmobile’s Roadside Assistance toll-free number is
staffed by courteous and capable Roadside Assistance
Representatives who are available 24 hours a day,
365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
Fuel delivery
. Lock-out service (identification required)
TQ\,?! ?Q fhe nezmnt rkaka!e-Ship for \,?Clmlt)/ spyjcp

or in the event of a vehicle-disabling accident

Flat tire change
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details. Jump starts
--AllTT-Y W S - C A 1-8QO-S330-- ~~ ~~~~~ ~~~~ ~~~ ~ ~~~~ ~~~ ~

7-5
 Minor repairs to disabled vehicles
Assistance when vehicle is mired in sand,
mud or snow
Trip routing
Trip interruption expense benefits
Dealership locator service
Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance specifically excludes
coverage for mounting, dismounting or changing of snow
tires, chains or other traction devices.
In some cases, where service is impractical, the driver
may be authorized to obtain other service for which
reimbursement is provided.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under Oldsmobile’s comprehensive warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
7-6
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
Location of vehicle
Telephone number of your location
Vehicle model, year and color
Mileage of vehicle
Vehicle Identification Number(VIN)
Vehicle license platenumber
Oldsmobile reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in
Oldsmobile’s judgement, the claims become excessive
in frequency or type of occurrence.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling for
you and your family. Remember, we’re only a
phone call away. Oldsmobile Roadside Assistance:
1-800-442-OLDS (6537), text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-888-889-2438.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
Oldsmobile has alwaysexemplified quality and value in
To enhance your ownership
its offering of motor vehicles.
experience, weand our participating dealers are proud to
offer Courtesy Transportation, customer
a support
program for new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
retail purchaseAease customers in conjunction with
the Bumper-to-Bumper coverage provided by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Several transportation
options are available when warranty repairs are
required. This will reduce your inconvenience during
warranty repairs.
Plan Ahead When Possible
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
It your vehicle cannot be scneauiea Into tne service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership, let
them know this, and ask for instructions.
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for same day repair.
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait Oldsmobile
helps minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
Shuttle Service
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes a
one way shuttle ride to a destination up to 10 miles
from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement up to $30 per day (five days maximum)
may be available for the use of public transportation
such as taxi or bus. In addition, should you arrange
transpnrtatinn thrn~Iah3,friend nr relati\/e, reimhlJrsement
for reasonable fuel expenses up to $10 per day (five day
maximum) may be available. Claim amounts should
reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts.
7-7
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
When your vehicle is unavailable due to overnight
warranty repairs, your dealer may arrange to provide
you with a courtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you
for a rental vehicle you obtained, at actual cost, up to
a maximum of $30.00 per day supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible
for taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
7-8
Additional Program Information
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
Reporting Safety Defects to the Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government Canadian Government
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition to notifying Motors of Canada Limited. You may write to:
General Motors. Transport Canada
330 Sparks Street
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an Tower C
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in Ottawa, Ontario K1A ON5
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer or
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors. General Motors
To contact NHTSA, YOU may either call the Auto Safety In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to: Please call us at 1-800-442-6537, or write:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation Oldsmobile Customer Assistance Center
Washington, D.C. 20590 P.O. Box 33171
netreit, !A! 48232-5! 71
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline. In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre 163-005
Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

7-9
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Manuals
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle, suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $120.00
Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer
Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair service
procedures, adjustments, and specifications for GM
transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $50.00
7-10
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors cars
and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual, and
Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:OO AM - 6:QQPM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-Mastercard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the
World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P. 0. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.

7-11
 AM ............................................................. 3-103
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-105
AccessoryInflator ........................................... 5-68 Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) ............................ 4-7
AccessoryPower Outlets ................................. 3-24 Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-45
AddingWasher Fluid ....................................... 5-38 Appearance Care ............................................ 5-87
AdditionalProgram Information ........................... 7-8 Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-90
Additives, Fuel ..................... ,.... ......... 5-6 Chemical Paint Spotting ............................... 5-93
Add-on Electrical Equipment ................. ... 5-96 Cleaning the Inside ofYour Vehicle ................ 5-87
Adjusting the Captain's Chairs Cleaning the Outside of Your Vehicle .............. 5-90
(SecondRow) ............................................. 1-13 Finish Damage ............................................ 5-92
Adjusting the Speakers GMVehicleCare/Appearance Materials .......... 5-93
(Balance/Fade) ............................ 3-66, 3-73, 3-82 Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 5-92
Air Bag Underbody Maintenance ............................... 5-93
ReadinessLight .......................................... 3-43 Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-90
Air Bag Systems ............................................. 1-69 Arming and Disarming the Content
HowDoes ari Air Bag Restrain? .................... 1-74 Theft-Deterrent System ............. ......... 2-70
Servicing YourAir Bag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 1-76 Arming Confirmation .................... ............ 2-28
What Makes an Air Bag Inflate? .................... 1-74 Arming with thePowerLockSwitch ... ......... 2-27
What Will You See After an Arming with the Remote Keyless Entry
AirBagInflates? ...................................... 1-74 Transmitter ................................................. 2-28
When Should an Air Bag Inflate? ................... 1-73 Arming with Your Key ...................................... 2-28
Where Are the Air Bags? .............................. 1-71 Audio Speakers .............................................. 3-93
A :. n r - ..
Eflyirle ................................. 5- IS
I ~ . E R

h d l 0 System(s) ............................................. 3-63

~

~ I 'clttmIw/t-lller,
I
All
Overseas Locations ....... ........................ 7-4 Audio Systems
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-86 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-102
All-Wheel Drive ............................................... 5-50 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-103
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning Message .......... 3-59 Care ofYourCD and DVD Player ................ 3-104
All-Wheel-Drive (AWD) System ......................... 4-1 1 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-104
AluminumWheels ........................................... 5-92 Fixed Mast Antenna ................. ... 3-105
Audio Systems (cont.) Brake
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-71 Parking .................................. .... 2-39
RadiowithCD ............................................ 3-64 System Inspection ....................... ........ 6-15
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-80 SystemWarning Light ...................... .... 3-44
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ...................... 3-98, 3-100 Brake Fluid .................................................... 5-39
Setting the Time .......................................... 3-63 BrakeWear ................................................... 5-41
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-101 Brakes .......................................................... 5-39
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-103 Braking ........................................................... 4-6
AutomaticDoorLocks ..................................... 2-64 Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-9
Automatic Level Control ................................... 4-35 Break-In, NewVehicle ..................................... 2-32
Automatic Transaxle Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-52
Fluid ....................................................... 5-20 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Operation ................................................... 2-36 Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-54
Automatic Transaxle Check .............................. 6-1 1 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock Control Headlamps ................................................. 5-52
SystemCheck ................................... ... 6-12 Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-57
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-56
B Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-64
Backing Up .................................................... 4-41
Battery .......................................................... 5-43
Battery Replacement ......................................... 2-8 C
Battery Run-Down Protection ............................ 3-20 California Fuel .......................................... 5-6
Before Leaving on a Long Trip ......................... 4-23 Canada ..................................... .......... 7-4
Before You Drive ............................................ 3-91 Canadian
Owners ....................... ................. II
(BenchSeat) .................................................. 1-37 Canadian Roadside Assistance ........................... 7-6
Bench Seat, Split ............................................. 1-8 Canceling the Sliding Door
Body Lubrication Service .................................. 6-1 1 Security Lock .............................................. 2-16
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-1 03 Child Restraints
Captain Chairs. Rear ....................................... 1-13 Child RestraintSystems ............................... 1-51
CarbonMonoxide ................... 4-26, 4-36, 2-22, 2-43 Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-48
Care of Lower Anchorages and Top Tethers for
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-90 Children (LATCHSystem) .......................... 1-58
Care of Your Older Children .......................................... 1-45
Cassette Tape Player ................................. 3-103 Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
CD and DVD Player ................................... 3-104 theLATCHSystem ................................ 1-60
CDs andDVDs ......................................... 3-104 Securing a Child Restraint in a Center
Cargo Lamp ................................................... 3-20 Seat Position ........................................... 1-64
Carrier Assembly-Differential Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
(RearDriveModule) .................................... 5-51 OutsideSeat Position ............................... 1-60
CassetteTapeMessages ................................. 3-77 Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Cassette Tape Player Service ........................... 6-10 Front Seat Position ................................... 1-66
CDAdapterKits ............................................. 3-78 Top Strap ................................................... 1-55
iup S+m
-I--- clap Anchor L ~ a t i o ~~
............................ 1-56
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-37
Chains, Tires .................................................. 5-67 Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-54
ChangeEngine Oil Message ............................ 3-56 Cleaning
ChargingSystemIndicatorMessage .................. 3-54 Inside ofYourVehicle .................................. 5-87
Check Outside ofYour Vehicle ................................ 5-90
EngineLight ............................................... 3-47 UnderbodyMaintenance ............................... 5-93
Checking Coolant ............................................ 5-24 VideoScreen ............................................ 3-105
PhneLinm Enm;nn A : I 4 A IAr- - ..
.._I I . 1-

lyll I G V I 1 ........................................ V V e d l l IelsLIIps ..............................................

-11-
l~ur\iIly
V I L i 4-I y. 5-YU
Checking or Replacing the Engine YourDVD Player ....................................... 3-105
Air CleanedFilter ......................................... 5-19 Cleaning Exterior LampsILenses ....................... 5-91
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10 Climate Control System ................................... 3-25
Checking Your Restraint Systems ...................... 1-77 Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ................. 3-37
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................... 5-93 Dual .......................................................... 3-28

3
Climate Control System (cont.) Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
Outlet Adjustment .................................... 3-31 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
Rear .................................................. 3-32, 3-34 GM Mobility Program for Persons with
Comfort Controls ............................................. 3-25 Disabilities ................................................ 7-5
Compact Disc Messages ................. 3-25, 3-79, 3-91 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors ...... 7-9
Compact Overhead Console ............................. 2-54 Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian
Compact Spare Tire ........................................ 5-86 Government .............................................. 7-9
CompassVariance .......................................... 3-61 Reporting Safety Defects to the United States
Content Theft-Deferrent .................................... 2-27 Government .............................................. 7-9
Content Theft-Deterrent System ........................ 2-69 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-5
Content Theft-Deterrent System, Arming and Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-10
Disarming ................................................... 2-70
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-6
Convenience Center ........................................ 2-60
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-59
DaytimeRunningLamps/Automatic
Coolant HeadlampSystem ....................................... 3-15
EngineTemperatureGage ............................ 3-47 Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
EngineTemperatureWarningMessage ........... 3-53
Defogging and Defrosting ......................... 3-27, 3-30
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-35
Delayed Illumination andExit Lighting ................ 2-63
Cooling System .............................................. 5-29
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-10 Delayed Lighting ............................................. 3-18
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-54 Dinghy Towing ................................................ 4-33
Directing the Airflow ................................ 3-33, 3-35
Current and Past Model Order Forms ................ 7-1 1
Disarming with the Remote Keyless
Customer Assistance Information Entry Transmitter ..................................... 2-28
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Disarming with Your Key .................................. 2-28
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone(TTY)Users ............................... 7-3 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-3
Dolly Towing .................................................. 4-33
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Dome Lamp ................................................... 3-17

4
Door DVD
AjarWarningMessage ................................. 3-57 Care ofYour .......................................... 3-104
Dual Sliding Doors ....................................... 2-13 Care of Your DVD Player ............................ 3-104
Last Door Closed Locking ............................. 2-1 1 Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-105
Locks .......................................................... 2-9 Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-105
Power Door Locks ....................................... 2-10 Distortion .................................................. 3-103
Power Sliding Door ...................................... 2-16 Entertainment System .................................. 3-91
Power Sliding Warning Message .................... 3-56 DVD Player .................................................... 3-94
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt .....................................
Driver Information Center (DIC) .........................
1-28
3-60
E
Eight-Way Power Seats ..................................... 1-3
Driving
Electrical System
At Night .................................................. 4-17
Add-on Equipment ...................................... 5-96
City ........................................................ 4-21
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 5-96
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Power Windows and Other Power Options ...... 5-96
Freeway ..................................................... 4-22
Windshield WiperFuses ............................... 5-96
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-24
Emissions Inspection and
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-18
Maintenance Programs ............................. 3-50
Winter ........................................................ 4-26
Engine
Driving On Grades .......................................... 4-42
4 - a,.
Air CleanedFilter ...................... ........5-19
ZrkiGCJ Gfi Sncjiiv Gi- kl3 ....................................
n

Battery ....................................................... 5-43

Driving Through Deep Standing Water ............... 4-20
Change Oil Message ................................... 3-56
Driving Through Flowing Water ......................... 4-20
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-47
Driving with a Trailer ....................................... 4-40
Coolant ...................................................... 5-23
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-28
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-35
Dual Trip Odometers ....................................... 3-41
Cnn!ant Temperature G2ge ........................... 3-47

5
Engine (cont.)
Coolant Temperature Warning Message .......... 3-53
Cooling System Inspection ............................ 6-1 4
Engine Compartment Overview .... ........... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-43
Low Oil Level Message ................................ 3-55
Oil ............................................................. 5-14
Overheating ................................................ 5-26
Starting ...................................................... 2-34
Engine Coolant Level Check ............................. 6-10
Engine Oil Additives ......................... ....... 5-17
Engine Oil and Chassis Lubrication
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-5
Engine Oil Level Check ................................... 6-10
Engine Specifications ..................................... 5-104
Entering Programming Mode ............................ 2-63
Entertainment System ...................................... 3-91
Cleaning the Video Screen .......................... 3-105
Cleaning Your DVD Player .......................... 3-105
DVD Distortion .......................................... 3-103
Entry Lighting ................................................. 3-18
Erasing HomeLink@Buttons .............................. 2-52
Exit Lighting ................................................... 3-19
Exiting Programming Mode ............................... 2-71
Express-Down Window .................................... 2-25
Extender, Safety Belt ....................................... 1-44
Exterior Lamps ............................................... 3-14
F
FabricKarpet ................................................. 5-87
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-19
Finding a PTY Station ..................... 3.67.3.74. 3-83
Finding a Station ............................ 3-65, 3-72, 3-81
Finish Care .................................................... 5-91
Finish Damage ............................................... 5-92
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-105
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-69
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-70
Flip and Fold RearSeats .................................. 1-7
Fluid
Automatic Transaxle ..................................... 5-20
Power Steering ........................................... 5-37
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-38
FM .............................................................. 3-103
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-16
Folding or Reclining theSeatbacks ............. 1-8, 1-14
Folding the Seatback ....................................... 1-18
Following Distance .......................................... 4-41
Footnotes ........................................................ 6-5
Front Reading Lamps ...... ........................ 3-19
Front Seat Storage Net ................................ 2-55
Fuel ............................................................... 5-5
Additives ................. .......................... 5-6
California Fuel ....................................... 5-6
Fuel (cont.)
Filling a Portable Fuel Container ..................... 5-9
Filling YourTank ........................................... 5-7 Hatch Ajar Warning Message ............................ 3-58
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7 Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Gage ......................................................... 3-51 Head Restraints ............................................... 1-6
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5 Headlamp Wiring ............................................ 5-96
GasolineSpecifications .................................. 5-5 Headlamps .................................................... 5-52
Low Warning Message ................................. 3-59 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-52
System Inspection ....................................... 6-14 Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Fuses Parking Lamps ......................................... 5-54
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ........................... 5-96 Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-52
Windshield Wiper ......................................... 5-96 Headphones ................................................... 3-92
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-4
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-24
G Hill and Mountain Roads ..................................
Hitches ..............................................
4-24
..... 4-39
Gage HomeLink Transmitter,Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Engine Coolant Temperature ......................... 3-47 HomeLink@Transmitter ................................ 2-49
Fuel .......................................................... 3-51 Hood
Speedometer .............................................. 3-41 Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-49 Release ..................................................... 5-10
Gasoline Horn ............................................................... 3-7
Octane ........................................................ 5-5 i i u w tile Sysierrl Yiurks ................................... 3-za
^ ^

Specifications ............................................... 5-5 How to Add Coolant to the Coolant

Gate Operator and Canadian Programming ........ 2-52 Recovery Tank ............................................ 5-31
Glass Surfaces ............................................... 5-89 How to Add Coolant to the Radiator .................. 5-34
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-54 How to Add Fluid ............................................ 5-22
GM Mobility
. . Program for Persons with
E How to Check ........................................ 5-20, 5-61
Disab!!!t!es .................................................... 7-5 How to Check Power Steering Fluid .................. 5-38

7
How to Use This Manual ................... .... ii Inspection (cont.)
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 1-27 Throttle System ........................................... 6-15
Hydroplaning .................................................. 4-20 Transfer Care (Power Transfer Unit) and
Carrier Assembly-Differential
(Rear Drive Module) All-Wheel Drive ........... 6-15
I Instrument Panel
Cluster .......................................... .......... 3-40
If No Steam Is Coming From Overview ...................................... .... ........... 3-4
Your Engine ................................................ 5-28
Switchbank .................................... .......... 3-21
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine ............... 5-27
Instrument Panel Brightness ................ .......... 3-17
If the Light Is Flashing ..................................... 3-49
Instrument Panel FuseBlock ............... .......... 5-97
If the Light Is On Steady ................................. 3-49
IfYou Are Stuck in Sand. Mud. Ice or Snow ....... 4-30
Interior Lamps ................................... .......... 3-17
Interior Lamps Control ........................ .......... 3-17
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer ..................... 4-37
Interior Lamps Override ...................... .......... 3-17
If You’re Caught in a Blizzard ........................... 4-28
Interior Plastic Components ................. .......... 5-89
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-32
Ignition Transaxle LockCheck .......................... 6-13
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-48
Inflation - Tire Pressure ................................... 5-61
Inspection Jump Starting ......................... . 5-44
BrakeSystem ............................................. 6-15
Engine Cooling System ................................ 6-14
ExhaustSystem .......................................... 6-14
Fuel System ............................................... 6-14
Part C - Periodic Maintenance ....................... 6-14 Key Lock Cylinders Service ............................... 6-11
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-5
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle Keys ............................................................... 2-3
Boot and Seal ..................................... 6-14
 Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-34
L Lockout Deterrent ........................................... 2-65
Lamps Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Exterior ..... ......................................... 3-14 Locks
Interior ....................................................... 3-17 Automatic Door ........................................... 2-64
Lamps on Reminder ........................................ 3-14 Door ........................................................... 2-9
LapBelt ........................................................ 1-37 Last Door Closed Locking ............................. 2-11
Lap-§boulder Belt ................................... 1-28, 1-39 Leaving Your Vehicle .................................... 2-13
Last Door Closed Locking ................................ 2-1 1 Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Last Door Locking ........................................... 2-65 Power Door ................................................ 2-10
LATCHSystem Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-12
Child Restraints ......................................... 1-58 Loss of Control ............................................... 4-16
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for Low Engine Oil Level Message ......................... 3-55
theLATCHSystem ................................... 1-60 Low Fuel WarningMessage ............................. 3-59
Leather ......................................................... 5-89 Low Oil Pressure Message ............................... 3-54
LeavifiCJ YGl.i7 L'shicle ....................................... n - I3
L- i Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-56
Leaving Your Vehicle With the
EngineRunning .......................................... 2-41
Liftgate .......................................................... 2-22
Light
Air Bag Readiness ....................................... 3-43 Maintenance. Normal Replacement Parts .......... 5-105
Maintenance Schedule
Anti-Lock BrakeSystemWarning ................... 3-45
ne-i*- n a - :
I A I At Fach F!!d Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........... c;-!c!
ut ane 3 ~ 3 1I I ~ v 1V ~ I II 111 ................................. 3-44
Malfunction indicator .................. .......... 3-47 At
Least
Once
Month
a ............. ........ 6-10
Safety Belt Reminder ................................... 3-42 At Least Once
a Year ........... ........ 6-11
TCSWarningLight ...................................... 3-46 At Least Twice a Year .................................. 6-10
BrakeSystem Inspection .............................. 6-15
Traction Control System(TCS)Warning .......... 3-46
Lighted Vanity Mirror ....................................... 2-26 Engine Cooling System Inspection ................. 6-14

9
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Exhaust System Inspection ........................... 6-14
Fuel System Inspection ................................ 6-14
How This Section is Organized ....................... 6-3
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ......... 6-4
Part B - Owner Checks and Services ............. 6-10
Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections ...... 6-14
Part D - Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants ............................................... 6-16
Part E . Maintenance Record ........................ 6-18
ScheduledMaintenance ................................. 6-5
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Bootand Seal Inspection .......................... 6-14
Throttle System Inspection ............................ 6-15
Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) and
Carrier Assembly-Differential (Rear Drive
Module) All-Wheel Drive Inspection ............. 6-15
Using Your ................................................... 6-4
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Maintenance When Trailer Towing ..................... 4-43
Making Turns ................................................. 4-41
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-47
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-2
10
Matching Transmitter(s)to Your Vehicle ................. 2-7
MemorySeat ................................. ......... 2-72
Message
All-Wheel Drive Disable Warning ....... ..... 3-59
Center ...................................... ......... 3-52
ChangeEngine Oil ...................................... 3-56
ChargingSystemIndicator ............................ 3-54
Door Ajar Warning ....................................... 3-57
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning ............. 3-53
Low Engine Oil Level ................................... 3-55
Low Fuel Warning ................................... 3-59
Low Oil Pressure .................... ............. 3-54
PASS-Key@Ill Security ............................. 3-58
Power Sliding DoorWarning ......................... 3-56
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning .............................. 3-58
Service Traction System Warning ................... 3-52
Traction Active ............................................ 3-53
Mirrors
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-45
Outside ConvexMirror ................................. 2-46
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-46
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-45
Mexico, Central America and Caribbean
Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and
U S. Virgin Islands) ........................................ 7-4
 Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode .......................................... 5-26
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-32 Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ........... 5-105 Owner’s Information ........................................ 7-10

Odometer ............................ ~ ......................

~1 3-41 Park Aid ........................................ . 3-22
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-14 Park (P)
Oil Shifting Into ................................ ..... 2-40
Engine ....................................................... 5-14 Shifting Out of ......................... ..... 2-42
Pressure Message ....................................... 3-54 Parking
OlderChildren,Restraints ................................ 1-45 Assist ......................... .................... 3-22
Onstar@Personal Calling ................................. 2-48 Brake ........................................................ 2-39
OnStap Services ............................................ 2-47 Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-43
Onstar@ System ............................................. 2-47 Parking Brake and Automatic Transaxle
Onstar@Virtual Advisor .................................... 2-48 Park (P) Mechanism Check ........................... 6-13
Operation .............................................. 3-25, 3-28 Parking on Hills .............................................. 4-42
Operation Tips ................................................ 3-31 Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ............ 6-4
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6 Part B - Owner Checks and Services ................ 6-10
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-31 Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .......... 6-14
Outside Part D - RecommendedFluidsand Lubricants .... 6-16
Convex iviirror ............................................. 2-46 Part E - Maintenance Record ........................... 6-18
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-46 Passenger Compartment Air Filter ..................... 3-37
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-45 Passing ................................................. 4-14, 4-41
OverheadConsole .......................................... 2-55 PASS-Key@Ill ................................................ 2-29
Overhead Console Switchbank .......................... 3-21 PASS-Key@Ill Operation .................................. 2-30

11
PASS-Key@Ill Security Message ....................... 3-58
Plan Ahead When Possible ................................ 7-7
Playing a Cassette Tape .................................. 3-76 Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-26
Playing aCompactDisc .................. 3-69, 3-78, 3-86
Playing a Specific Loaded
CompactDisc .............................................
Playing the Radio ........................... 3-64, 3-71, 3-80
3-87 R
Radiator Pressure Cap .................................... 5-26
Programmable Modes . ~ ...............................
~ ~ ~ 2-70 Radio Messages ..................................... 3-69, 3-76
Power Radios .......................................................... 3-63
Accessory Outlets ..................... ... 3-24 Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-103
Door
Locks .............................. ....... 2-10 Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-104
Eight-Way
Seats ....................... ..... 1-3 Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-104
Electrical System ................... ... 5-96 Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-71
Rear Quarter Windows .......................... 2-26 Radio with CD ............................................ 3-64
Six-Way Seats .............................................. 1-3 Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................ 3-80
Sliding Door ................................................ 2-16 Rear Seat Audio ................................ 3-98, 3-100
Sliding Door Warning Message ...................... 3-56 Setting the Time .......................................... 3-63
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-37 Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-101
Windows ......................................... .... 2-25 Understandinq Reception ............................ 3-1 03
Power Steering ............................................... 4-12
u

RDS Messages .............................. 3-68, 3-75, 3-85

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ................................ 1-44
Primary Radio Controls .................................... 3-98
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-12
Programmable Modes ............. 2-63, 2-64, 2-65, 2-66,
2-67, 2-69
Programming Mode
Entering ..................................................... 2-63
Exiting ....................................................... 2-71
Programming the HomeLink Transmitter ............. 2-50
Rear Climate Control System ................... 3-32, 3-34
Rear Hatch Ajar Warning Message .................... 3-58
Rear ReadingLamps ...................................... 3-20
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-42
Rear Seat Audio ................................... 3-98, 3-100
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-7
Rear Seat Outside Passenger Positions ............. 1-39
Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .................. 1-39

12
RearSeatRadio Controls ...................... 3-98, 3-100 Replacing the
Convenience Center .... .... 2-60
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-58 Replacing the Split Bench Seat ............. .... 1-11
Rear Window Defogger ............................ 3-27, 3-30 Replacing the Stowable Seat ........................ 1-20
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-45 Reporting Safety Defects
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-4 CanadianGovernment ................................... 7-9
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-32 General Motors ............................................. 7-9
Remote Alarm .................................................. 2-7 United States Government .............................. 7-9
Remote Control .............................................. 3-96 Reprogramming a Single HomeLink@Button ....... 2-53
Remote Driver Unlock Control ........................... 2-66 Resetting Defaults ........................................... 2-53
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-5 Resetting the Power Sliding Door ...................... 2-21
Remote Keyless EntrySystem, Operation ............ 2-6 Restraint System Check ................................... 6-10
Remote Lock and Unlock Confirmation ............... 2-67 Checking Your Restraint Systems .... .... 1-77
Remote Power Sliding Door Operation ................. 2-7 Replacing Restraint System Parts
Removingthe Captain’s Chairs ......................... 1-15 After aCrash .......................................... 1-77
Removing the Convenience Center .................... 2-60 Restraint Systems
iiert-rouiny the Fiat Tire and insiaiiing the Checking .................................................... 1-77
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-76 Replacing Parts ........................................... 1-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-71 Restraints, Head ............................................... 1-6
Removing the SplitBenchSeat ........................ 1-10 Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-33
Removing the Stowable Seat ............................ 1-19
Retro-Active Reset .......................................... 3-42
RemovingtheWheelCovers ............................ 5-76
ReplacementBulbs ......................................... 5-57 Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-37
n--A-. A-
Fiepiacingi3rakeSystem Faris .......................... 5-42 1r1uaua1uc
ReplacingRestraintSystem Parts Assistance Program ....................................... 7-5
After a Crash .............................................. 1-77 Rocking Your Vehicle To Get It Out ................... 4-31
Replacing the Captain’s Chairs ........... ... 1-16 Running Your Engine While YouAre Parked ....... 2-44

13
 S Seats (cont.)
Memory ............................................. 2-72
Safety Belt Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-7
Pretensioners ........................................... 1-44 Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-4
Reminder Light ...................... ....
, ....... 3-42 Six-WayPower Seats ................................ 1-3
Safety Belts Split BenchSeats ..................................... 1-8
Care of ...................................................... 5-90 StowableSeat ............................................ 1-18
Center Passenger Position ............................ 1-37 Securing a Child Restraint
Driver Position ............................................ 1-28 Center Seat Position .................... , ........ 1-64
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................ 1-27 Designed for the LATCH System ... ........ 1-60
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ..... 1-26 Rear Outside Seat Position ....................... 1-60
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides for Right Front Seat Position .......................... 1-66
Children and Small Adults .........., ... 1-42 Security Message,PASS-Key@ Ill ...................... 3-58
RearSeatPassengers ......................... 1-39 Security While You Travel .................................. 7-5
Right Front Passenger Position ...................... 1-37 Selecting theFanSpeed ......................... 3-33, 3-35
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-44 Service ........................................................... 5-3
Safety BeltUse During Pregnancy ................. 1-36 Adding Equipment to the Outside of
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-22 Your Vehicle .............................................. 5-4
Safety Chains ................................................. 4-40 Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-3
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-47
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-5 Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-10
Seats Traction System Warning Message ................. 3-52
Captain Chairs ............................................ 1-13 Service Bulletins ............................................. 7-10
Eight-Way Power Seats .................................. 1-3 Service Engine Soon Light in the United States
Flip and Fold Feature .................................... 1-7 or Check Engine Light in Canada .................. 3-47
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-6 Service Manuals ............................................. 7-10
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-4 Setting Preset PTYs ........................................ 3-84
Manual ........................................................ 1-2 Setting Preset Stations .................... 3-65, 3-72, 3-81

14
Setting the Temperature ........................... 3.33. 3-36 Storage Areas ......................... ............ 2-54
Setting the Time ............................................. 3-63 Compact Overhead Console ... ........ 2-54
Setting the Tone(BassTTreble) .......... 3.66.3.73. 3-82 Convenience Center ..................................... 2-60
Sheet Metal Damage ....................................... 5-92 Convenience Net ......................................... 2-59
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-40 Cupholder(s) ............................................... 2-54
Shifting Out of Park ‘(P) ....... .......... ............... 2-42 Front Seat Storage Net ................................ 2-55
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ......... . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30 GloveBox .................................................. 2-54
Skidding ............................ ....... ... 4-16 Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-56
SlidingDoor Overhead Console ....................................... 2-55
Power ............................ ............ ............... 2-16 Rear Storage Area ....................................... 2-58
SlidingDoorDelayedLocking ........... ............... 2-12 Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-81
SlidingDoorLock ........................... ............... 2-14 Storing the Spare Tire and Tools ....................... 5-82
Sliding Door Security Lock ............................... 2-15 Stowable Seat ................................................ 1-18
SlidingDoors.Dual ......................................... 2-13 Stuck in Sand, Mud. Ice or Snow ...................... 4-30
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips ....................... 4-20 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-26
SpareTire
Check .............................. ...... 6-11 Switchbanks ................................................... 3-21
SpecialFabricCleaning Problems ... , .......... 5-88 Overhead Console ....................................... 3-21
Specifications,Capacities ............................... 5-103 Switchbanks, Instrument Panel .......................... 3-21
Speedometer .................................................. 3-41
Split Bench Seats ............................................. 1-8
Starter Switch Check .......................................
Starting YourEngine .......................................
6-12
2-34
T
Taillamps
Steering ........................................................ 4 12
Turn Signal. Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-56
Steering in Emergencies .................................. 4-13
TCS Warning Light .......................................... 3-46
Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle
Theft.Deterrent. Radio .................................... 3-101
Boot and Seal Inspection .............................. 6-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-27
Steering Tips .................................................. 4-12
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-27
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-102
PASS-Key@III ....................................... 2-29
Stereo RCA J X ~ S.......................................... 3n -nn3 ~
PASS-Key@Ill Operation .... .... .... 2-30

15
Throttle System Inspection ..... ................ 6-15 Traction (cont.)
Tilt
Wheel ................................ ................. 3-7 Control SystemWarningLight ....................... 3-46
Tire Inflation Check ...................................... 6-10 Service Traction SystemWarningMessage ..... 3-52
Tires ..................................................... 5-60, 5-92 Trailer Brakes ................................................. 4-40
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-64 Trailer Wiring Harness ..................................... 4-43
Chains ....................................................... 5-67 Transaxle
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-70 Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-20
Compact Spare Tire ..................................... 5-86 Transaxle Operation, Automatic ......................... 2-36
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-69 Transfer Case (Power Transfer Unit) ..................5-50
Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 5-61 Transmission, Transaxle, Transfer Case
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-62 Unit Repair Manual ...................................... 7-10
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-65 Transportation Options ...................................... 7-7
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-66 Trip Computer ................................................ 3-62
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-66 Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-63 TurnSignaVMultifunctionLever ........................... 3-7
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater .................... 2-35 Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer ..................4-42
Topof the Instrument Panel ............................. 5-89
Top Strap ...................................................... 1-55
Top Strap Anchor Location ............................... 1-56
Torque Lock ................................................... 2-42
Underbody Flushing Service ............................. 6-13
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires .................. 4-39
Underhood Fuse Block ................................... 5-100
Towing
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-103
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-32
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-65
TowingaTrailer .......................................... 4-36
United States ................................................... 7-4
YourVehicle ............................................... 4-32
Used Replacement Wheels .............................. 5-67
Traction
Using Cleaner on Fabric .................................. 5-88
Active Message ........................................... 3-53
Using HomeLink@ ........................................... 2-52
Control System(TCS) .................................. 4-10

16
Using RDS .................................... 3.67.3.74. 3-83 VideoScreen ................................................. 3-94
Using Song List Mode ..................................... 3-89 Vinyl ............................................................. 5-89
Ustrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) .............. 3-22 Visor Vanity Mirror .......................................... 2-26
Visors ........................................................... 2-26

Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-6 Warm-up Shift ................................................ 2-38
DamageWarnings ........................................... iv Warning Lights. Gages and Indicators ................ 3-39
Loading ...................................................... 4-34 Warnings
Symbols ......................................................... iv HazardWarning Flashers ........................ 3-6
Vehicle Identification OtherWarning Devices .................................. 3-6
...
Number(VIN) .......................................... 5-95 Safety and Symbols ......................................... I I I
ServiceParts Identification Label ................ 5-95 Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Vehicle Personalization ................................. 2-62 Washing Your Vehicle ...................................... 5-90
Arming and Disarming the Content Weatherstrip Lubrication ................................... 6-11
Theft-DeterrentSystem ................... ... 2-70 Weight of the Trailer Tongue ............................. 4-38
Automatic
Door
Locks .................... ... 2-64 What Kind of Engine Oil to Use ........................ 5-16
Content Theft-Deterrent System ..................... 2-69 What to Do with Used Oil ................................ 5-18
Delayed Illumination and Exit Lighting ............. 2-63 What to Use .......................................... 5-24, 5-38
EnteringProgrammingMode ......................... 2-63 Wheels
Exitinq ProqramminqMode ........................... 2-71 Alianment and Tire
Balance ............... .... 5-66
Last Door Locking and Lockout Deterrent ........ 2-65 Replacement .................................... .... 5-66
Memory Seat .............................................. 2-72 When to Add Engine Oil ................... .... 5-15
RemoteDriverUnlock Control ....................... 2-66 When to Change Engine Oil
RemoteLockand Unlock Confirmation ........... 2-67 (GM Oil Life System) ................................... 5-17
VehicleStorage .............................................. 5-43 When to Check .............................................. 5-61
Ventilation Adjustment ...................................... 3-31

17
When to Check and Change ............................ 5-20
When to CheckPower Steering Fluid ................ 5-38
When You Are Ready to Leave After Parking
on a Hill ..................................................... 4-43
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-54
Why Safety Belts Work .................................... 1-23
Windshield, Backglass andWiper Blades ........... 5-91
Windows ....................................................... 2-24
Power ........................................................ 2-25
Power Rear Quarter ..................................... 2-26
Windshield Washer ........................................... 3-9
Fluid .......................................................... 5-38
18
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check ............ 6-10
Windshield Wiper
Blade Replacement .................. ........ 5-58
Fuses ........................................................ 5-96
Windshield Wipers ............................................ 3-9
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-26
Wiper Blade Check ..................... ............ 6-11
Weight of the Trailer ........................................ 4-38
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2